IS 456 With All Ammendments

Free Standard provided by BIS via BSB Edge Private Limited to Vivek Sharma
Allahabad(Vivanbhatt1234@gmail.com) 47.15.230.182 [for non-commercial use only].
IS 456 : 2000
2011)
(Reaffirmed
(Reaffirmed 2016)
(Reaffirmed 2021)
fllJOOIl'""""'I ~ SI~r<.1d 61'i9012 -
'Ufu flr~cll
(-:r:/r~ y;rite;rar )
Indian Standard
PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE CODE OF PRACTICE

( Fourth Revision)
Fourteenth Reprint AUGUST 2014
(Including Amendments No.1, 2, 3 & 4)
Ies 91.100.30
© BIS 2000
BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

MANAK BHAVAN, 9 BAHADUR SHAH ZAFAR MARG
NEW DELHI 110002
July 2000
Price Group 18 + Gr 3 + Gr 3
IS 456:2000
Indian Standard··
PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETECODE OF PRACTICE
( Fourth Revision)
FOREWORD
This Indian Standard (Fourth Revision) was adopted by the Bureau of Indian
Standards, after the dtl!ft finalized .
by the Cement and Concrete Sectional Committee had been approlled by the Civil
Engineering Division Council.
This standard was first published in 1953 under the title 'Code of practice for
plain and reinforcedcollcrete for
general building construction' and subsequently revised in 1957. The code was
furtber revised in 1964 and
published under modified title 'Code of practice for plain and reinforced
concrete', thus enlarging the scope of
use of this code to structures other than general building construction also. The
third revision was published in
1978, and it included limit state approach to de$ign.This is the fourth revision of
the standard. Thiuevision
was taken up with a view to keeping abreast with the rapid development in the field
of concrete techitology and
to bring in furth~r modifications/improvements in the light of e'l'perience gained
w,hile using the earlier version
of the standard.
.
.
.
This revision incorporate.s a number of important changes. The major tbmst in the
revision is on the.following
lines:
a) In recent years, durability of concrete structures have become the cause of
concern to all .concrete
technologists. This has led to the need to codify the durability requirements world
over. ,In this revision
of the code, in order to introduce in-built protection from factors affecting a
strUcture, earlier clause on
durability has been elaborated and a detailed clause covering different aspects of
design of durable
structure has been incorporated.
'
b) Sampling and acceptance criteria for·concrete have been revised. With this
reviSion acceptance criteria.
has' been simplified in line with the proviSions given.in BS 5328 (Part 4): 1990
'Conerete: Part 4
Specifi~ation for. the procedures to be used in sampling, testing and assessing
compliance of concrete',
Some of the significant changes incorporated in Section 2 are as follows:
a) All the three grades of ordinary Portland cemen~ n.mely 33 grade, 43 grade and
53 grade and sulphate
resisting Portland cement have been included in the list of types of cement used
(in'addition to other
types of cement).
'.
b) The permissible limits for solids in water have been modified keeping in view
the durability requirements ..
c) The clause onadmixtur~s has been modified in view of the availability of ne;'"
type~ of admixtures
includirig superplasticizers.
.
.
d) In Table 2 'Grades of Concrete', grades higher than.M 40 have been included. .
e) It has been recommended that minimum grade of concrete shall be not less than M
20 in reinforced
concrete work (see also 6.1.3).
'
f) The formula f~r estimation of modulus of elasticity of concrete has been
revised.
g) In the absence ,of proper correlation between compacting factor, vee-bee time
and slump, workability
has noW been specified only in terms of slump in line with the provisions In BS
5,328 (Parts 1 to 4).
h) Durability clause has been enlarged to include detiiled guidance concerning the
factors affecting durability.
The table on 'Environmental Exposure Conditions' has been modified to include 'very
severe' and
'extr~me' exposure conditions. This clause also cover~ requirements for shape and
size of member,
depth ~f cpncrete. coyer, cencrete-quality, requirement against exposure to
aggressive 'cbemical and sulphate
attack, minimum cement requirement and maximum water cement ratio, limits of
chloride content, alkali
silica reaction, and importance of compaction, finishing and curing.
j) A clause on 'Quality Assurance Measures' has been incorporated to give due
emphasis to good practices
of concreting.
k) Proper limits have been introduced on tbe accuracy of measuring equipments to
ensure accurate batching
of concrete.
1
IS 456: 2000
m) The clause .on 'CDnstructiDn JDints' has been modified.
n)
The clause .on 'InspectiDn' has be~n mDdified tD,giveplOre emphasis .on quality.
assurance.
The significant changes incorpDrated in SectiDn 3 are as fDIlDWS:

a)
Requirements fDr 'Fire Resistance' have been further detailed.
b) The figure fDr estimatiDn .of mDdification factDr fDr tensionreinfDrcement used
in calculatiDn .of basic
. values .of span tD effective depth tD cDntrDI the deflectiDn .of flexural member
has been mDdified.
c)
RecDmmendatiDns regarding effective length .of cantilever have been added.
d)
RecommendatiDns regarding deflection due tD lateral IDads have been added.
e) 'Rec'ommendatiDns fDr adjustments .of suppDrt moments in restrained slabs have

Deenincluded.
f)
In the detemination .of effective length .of cDmpressiDn members, stability index
has been introduced tD
detennine sw~y or no sWay conditions.
~. .
g) RecDmmendatiDns havebee~ made fDr lap length ~fhDDks fDr bars
.'
in direct tensiDn and ilexural tension.
h) RecDmmendatiDnsregarding strength DfweldShave been modified.
j)
RecDmmendatiDns regarding CDVer tD reinfDrcement have been mDdified. CDver has

been'. spe¢jfied '
based .on durability requirements for different expDsure cDnditiDns. The' term.
'nDullnm cDver' has been
introquced. The CDver has nDW been specified based .on durability requirement as
well as fDr fire
requirements.
-
,.
The significant change incDrpDrated in SectiDn 4 is the mDdificatiDn DHhe

clause .on Walls. The modified clause
"
'
.
includes design .of walls against hDriiDntal shear.'
In SectiDn 5Dn limit state method a new clause has been added fDr cakl!latiDn
Dfenhanced shearstr.mgth .of
sectiDns clDse tD SUppDrtS. SDme mDdificatiDns have alSD been made in the
clause .on TDrsiol1, FDnnula fDr
calculation of crack width has been added (separately given in Annex F).
'
,
WDrking stressmethDd has n.ow been given in Annex B- sDas to· give
greatercemphasislQ limit state desiga. In
this Annex,modificatiDnSTegarding torsion and enhanced,shear strength on the same
lines as in SeetioitS have
been made.
Whilst the common methods of design and constructiDn haye been,cov,ered inthi.
cDde, special, systems .of .
design and cDnstructiDn ohny plain or reinforced CDncrete slrucMe no! c,overed by
this code maybe permitted
.on prDductiDn .of satisfactDry '.viqence regar'dipg. their,adequacy
and~afety .by,anljlysi~ Dr, test Dr bDth
(see 19).
",.
,"
,'
In this cpde it has been assumed that the design .of plain and reinforcedeement
CDncrete w.Drkis entrusted 1..0 a
qualified engineer and that the execution of ~ement concrete wotki~'~arri~d
OU( under the directi~.n .of a qualified
and experienced supervisor.
_.
....
, '.
. ". _:
,
'
._ ,
.•.. , - , . <
"
I
._
In the formulatiDn .of this standard, assistance has been derived from
the,fDllowing publicati6ns: '
BS 5328: Part I : 1991'Concrete: Part I Guide'to'specifyil1gcDncrete,
'BritishStaildards-Institution
BS 5328 : Part 2 : 1991 CDncrete : Part 2 MethDds for specifying concrete mixes,
Briti~h Standards
Institution
'
<
"
BS 5328: Part 3 : 1990CDncrete : Part3 Sl'ecificatioliforthe prDcedures tD be,!

Isedinpro<!ucing a~d
transporting concrete, British Standards InstitutiDn
'
,,
'
", .
BS 5328 : Part4 : 1990 Concre!~: Part 4 Spedfica;;oll for

progedureS!D be ~sed in sampling: iesting
and assessing compiiance .of concrete, British 'Standards Institu\ion
'
,
;he
BS 811 0 : Part I :1985 Structural use .of CDncrete' : Part 1 Code ofpractice for
design and, cDnstructiDn,
British Standards Institution
BS 81!o : Part 2 : 1985 Structural Use .of concl'et,; : Part 2 COde .of practke for
special Circumstances,
British Standards InstitutiDn
'
ACI 319 :, 1989 Building code requirements fDr reinfDrced cDncrete, American
CDncrete Institute
AS 3600 : 1988 CDncrete structures, Standards AssDciatiDn pf Australia
2
IS 456: 2000
DIN 1045 July 1988 Structural use of concrete, design and construction, Deutsches
Institut fUr Nonnung E.V.
CBB-FIP Model code 1990, Comite Buro - International Du Belon
The composition of the technical committee responsible for the fonnulation of this
standard is given in
AnnexH.
For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is
complied with, the final value,
observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis shall be
rounded off in accordance with
IS 2 : 1960 'Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised)'. The number of
significant places retained in the
rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this
standard.
3
IS 456 : 2000·
CONTENTS
PAGE
SECTION 1 GENERAL
1
2
3
,sCOPE
REFERENCES
TERMINOLOGY
11
11
SYMBOLS
11
11
SECTION 2 MATERIALS, WORKMANSHIP, INSPECTION AND TESTING
5 MATERIALS
5.1
5.2
5.3
SA
5.5
5.6
5.7
6
13
Cement
Mineral Admixtures
Aggregates
Water
Admixtures
Reinforcement
Storage of Materials
13
13
.14.
"
14
15
15
15
;-.,'
CONCRETE .
15
6.1
6.2
15
15
Grades
Properties of Concrete
WORKABILITY OF CONCRETE
17
DURABILITY OF CONCRETE
17
8.1
8.2. Requirements for Durability
17
18
CONCRETE MIX PROPORTIONING
·22
9. i· Mix Proportion
9.2 Design Mix Concrete
22
22
23
9.3
General
Nominal Mix Concrete
10 PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE
.
'.-
10.1
Quality Assurance Measures
10.2
·10.3
Batching
Mixing
11.2
General
Cleaning and Treatment of Forrnwork
11.3
Stripping Time
23
23
.24
24
11 FORMWORK
ILl
...
25
;
:::
25
25
25
12 ASSEMBLY
OF REINFORCEMENT
,
25
13 TRANSPORTING, PLACING, COMPACTION AND CURING
26.
13. !
Transporting and Handling

13.2
13.3
Placing
Compaction
26- .
26
26
5
IS 456:2000
PAGE'
27
27
27
13.4 Construction Joints and Cold Joints

13.5 Curing
13.6 Supervision
27
14 CONCRETING UNDER SPECIAL CONDmoNs

14.1 Work in Extreme Weather Conditions
14.2 Under-Water Concreting
27
15 SAMPLING AND STRENGTH OF DESIGNED CONCRETE MIX
29
15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4
27
General
Frequency of Sampling
Test Specimen
Test Results of Sample
29
29
29
29
16 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
29
17 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF STRUCTIlRE
30
SECTION 3 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATION

18 BASES FOR DESIGN
18.1
18.2
18.3
18.4
32
Aim of Design
Methods of Design
Durability, Workmanship and Materials
Design Process
32
32
32
32
19 LOADS AND FORCES

19.1
19.2
19.3
19.4
19.5
19.6
19.7
19.8
19.9
32
General
Dead Loads '
Imposed Loads, Wind Loads and Snow Loads
Earthquake Forces
Shrinkage, Creep and Temperature Effects
32
32
32
32
32
Other Forces and Effects

Combination of Loads
Dead Load Counteracting Other Loads and Forces
Design Load
33
33
33
33
20 STABILITY OF THE STRUCTURE
33
20.1 Overturning
20.2 Sliding
20.3 Probable Variation in Dead Load
20.4 Moment Connection
20.5 Lateral Sway
21. FIRE RESISTANCE
33
33
33
33
33
33
22 ANALYSIS
34
22.1 General
22.2 Effective Span
34
34
35
22.3 Stiffness
6
IS 456: 2000
PAGE
35
22.6
Structural Frames
Moment and Shear Coefficients for Continuous Beams
Critical Sections for Moment and Shear
22.7
Redistribution of Moments
36
22.4
22.5
23 BEAMS
23.0
23;1
23.2
23.3
24.2
24.3
24.4
24.5
Effective Depth
T-Beams and L-Beams
Control of Deflection
Slenderness Limits for Beams to Ensure Lateral Stability
25.3
25.4
General
Slabs Continuous Over Supports
Slabs Monolithic with Supports
Slabs Spanning in Two Directions at Right Angles
Loads on Supporting, Beams
26.2
26.3
26.4
26.5
37
39
39
39
39
41
41
41
Definitions
Effective Length of Compression Members
Slenderness Limits for Columns
Minimum Eccentricity
26 REQUIREMENTS GOVERNING REINFORCEMENT AND DETAILING

26.1
36
36
39
25 CoMrRESSION MEMBERS
25.1
25.2
36
36
24 SOLID SLABS
24.1
35
General
Development of Stress in Reinforcement
Spacing of Reinforcement
Nominal Cover to Reinforcement
Requirements of Reinforcement for Structural Members
27 EXPANSION JOINTS
41
42
42
42
42
42
42
45
46
46
50
SECTION 4 SPECIAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FO~

., . STRUCTURAL MEMBERS AND SYSTEMS
28 CONCRETE O:>RBELS
28.1 General
28.2 Design
51
29 DEEP BEAMS
51
29.1
29.2
29.3
30
51
51
General
Lever Arm
Reinforcement
51
51
51
52
RIBBED, HOLLOW BLOCK OR VOIDED SLAB
30.1
30.2
30.3
30.4
General
Analysis of Structure
Shear
Deflection
52 ..
52
52
52
7
IS 456: 2000
PAGE
30.5
30.6
30.7
30.8
52
52
53
53
Size and Position of Ribs

Hollow Blocks and Formers
ArrangelDent of Reinforcement
Precast Joists and Hollow Filler Blocks
53
31 FLAT SLABS
31.1
31.2
31.3
31A
31.5
31.6
31.7
31.8
53
53
53
54
General
Proportioning
Determination of Bending Moment
Direct Design Method
Equivalent Frame Method
Shear in Flat Slab
Slab Reinforcement
Openings in Flat Slabs
56
57
59
61
61
32 WALLS
32.1
32,2
32.3
32.4
32.5
General
Empirical Design Method for Walls Subjected to lnplane Vertical Loads
Walls Subjected to Combined Horizontal and Vertical Forces
Design for Horizontal Shear
Minimum Requirements for Reinforcement in Walls
62
62
62
63
33 STAIRS
33.1
33.2
33.3
61
61
63
Effective Span of Stairs

Distribution of Loading on Stairs
Depth of Section
63
63
63
34 FOOTINGS
34.1
General
63
34.2
Moments and Forces
64.
34.3
Tensile Reinforcement
65
34.4
Transfer of Load at the Base of Column
65
34.5
Nominal Reinforcement
66
SECTIONS STRUCnJIW. DESIGN (LiMIT STATE METHOD)

35 SAFETY AND SERVICEABILITY REQUffiEMENTS
67
35.1
35.2
General
Limit State of Collapse
35.3
Limit States of Serviceability
67
67
35.4
Other Limit States
67
67
36 CHARAcrERISTIC AND DESIGN VALUES AND PARTIAL SAFETY FACfORS
67
36.1
Characteristic Strength of Materials
67
36.2
Characteristic Loads
36.3
36.4
Design Values
Partial Safety Factors
67
68
68
37 ANALYSIS
68
37.1
68
Analysis of Structure
8
IS 456: 2000
PAGE
38
39
40
41
LIMIT STATE of COLLAPSB : FulxURB
69
38.1
69
Assumptions
LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSB: CoMPRESSION
70
39.1
39.2
39.3
39.4
39.5
39.6
39.7
70
AssUI!lptions
Minimum Eccentricity
Short Axially Loaded Members in Compression
Compression Members with Helical Reinforcement
Members Subjected to COl\lbined Axial Load imd Uniaxial Bending
Members Subjected to Combined Axial Load and Biaxial Bending
Slender Compressiofi Members
I
i
43
71
71
71
71
71
LIMIT STATE OF .CoLLAPSE : SHEAR
72
40.1
40.2
40.3
40.4
40.5
72
72
72
72
74
Notpinal Shear Stress

Design Shear Strength of CoIlprete
Minimum Shear Reinforcement
Design of Shear Reinforcement
Enhanced Shear Strength of Sections Close to Supports
LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE: TORSION
74
41.1
41.2.
4L3
41.4
74
75
General
Critical Section
Shear and Torsion
.Reinforcement in Members Subjected to Torsion
42 .LIMIT STATE OF SERVICEABILITY: DEFLECTION
71
75
75
75
42.1 . Flexural Members
75
LIMIT STATE OF SBRVICEABILITY: CRACKING
76
43.1
43.2
76
76
Flexural Members
Compression Members
ANNEX A
LIST OF REFERRED INDIAN STANDARDS
77
ANNEX B
STRUCTURAL DESIGN (WORKING STRESS METHOD)
80
B-1
GENERAL
B-1. 1
B-1.2
B-l.3
8"-2
B-3
General Design Requirements··

Redistribution of Moments
Assumptions for Design of Members
80
80
80
80
PBRMISSIDLE STRESSES
80
B-2.1
B-2.2
B-2.3
80
80
80
Permissible Stresses in Concrete

Permissible Stresses in Steel Reinforcement
Increase in Permissible Stresses
PERMISSIDLB LOADS IN COMPRESSION MEMBERS

81
B-3..1
B-3.2
B-3.3
B-3.4
81
81
81
Pedestals and Short Columns with Lateral Ties

Short Columns with Helical Reinforcement
Long Columns
Composite Columns
81
IS 456 : :!OOO
B-4
MIlMBERS SUIlJECmi:> TO COMBINBD AxiAL LoAD AND BBNDING

. B-4.1
Design Based en Uncracked Section
B-4.2 Design Based on Cracked· Section
B-4.3
B-S
Nominal Shear Stress

Design Shear Strength of Concrete
Minimum Shear Reinforcement .
Design of Shear Reinforcement
En!tanced Shear Strength of Sections Close to Supports
83
84
85
85
8S
General
Critical Section
Shear and Torsion
Reinforcement in Members Subjected to lbrsion
86
86
86
86
86
TOIISION
B'6.1
B-6.2
B~.3
B-6.4
ANNEXC CALCULATION OF DEFLECTION

C·I
83
83
83
83
SHIJAR
B-S.l
. B-S.2
B-S.3
B-S.4
B-S.S
B-6
Members Subjected to Combined Direct. Load and Flexure
83
88
88
88
TOTAL DEFLI!crION
C-2 . SIIORl'-'I'ERM D\!F!.EcnON

C-3 'DmulcnON DUE TO SIIRlNKAGE
C-4 DEFLBC\10N DUB TO CREEP
88
89
ANNEX D. SLABS SPANNING IN TWO DIRECTIONS
90
D-1
REs1'RA1NEO SLABS
90
0-2'
SIMPLY SuPPORI'EO SI.ABS
90
ANNEX E EFFECTIVE LENGTH OF COLUMNS
92
ANNEX F CALCULATION OF CRACK WIDTH

ANNEX G MOMENTS OF RESISTANc;E FOR RECTANGULAR AND T-SE¢n0NS
.9S
G-I
RBcrANGULAR SECTIONS
G-I.1
G-I.2
Sections without Compression Reinforcement

Sections with Compression Reinforcement
G-2 FLANGED SBCl'ION

ANNEX H COMMlTI'EE COMPOSITION
96
96
96
96
96
98
10
IS 456 : 2000'
SECTION 1 GENERAL
EL - Earthquake load
1 SCOPE
E,
1.1 This standard deals with the general structural use

of plain and reinforced concrete.
f",
1.1.1 For the purpose of this standard, plain concrete

structures are those where reinforcement, if provided
is ignored for detennination of strength of the structure.
1.2 Special requirements of structures, such as shells,
folded plates, arches, bridges, chimneys, blast resistant
structures, hydraulic structures, liquid retaining
structures andearthqualre resistant structures, covered
in respective standards have not been covered in this
standard; these standards shall be used in conjunction
with this standard.
Modulus of elasticity of steel

Eccentricity
Characteristic cube compressive
strength of concrete
- Modulus of rupture of concrete
(flexural tensile strength)
,
-
Splitting tensile strength of concrete

Design strength
Characteristic strength of steel
Unsupported height of wall
Effective height of wall
Effective moment of inertia
Moment of inertia of the gross section
excluding reinforcement
Moment of intertia of cracked section
Stiffness of member
Constant or coefficient or factor
Development length
Live load or imposed load
Horizontal distance between centres of
lateral restraint
2 REFERENCES
The Indian Standards listed in Annex A contain
provisions which through reference in this text,
constitute provisions of this standard At the time of
publication, the editions indicated were valid. All
standards are subject to revision and parties to
agreements based on this standard are encouraged .\0
investigate the possibility of applying the most recent
editions of the standards indicated in Annex A.
1,
K
k
, Ld
LL
Lw
3 TERMINOLOGY
,I
. For the purpose of this standard, the definitions given

in IS 4845 and IS 6461 (Parts I to 12) shall generally
apply.
Length of a column or beam between

adequate lateral restraints or the
unsupported length of a column
I,,'
Effective span of be~m or slab or

effective length of column
/'"
I"
I,
I',
Effective length about x-x axis
Effective length about y-y axis
Clear span, face-to-face of supports
Length of shorter side of slab

-
Length of longer side of slab
Distance between points of zero

moments in a beam
4 SYMBOLS
For the purpose of this standard, the following letter
symbols shall have, the meaning indicated against each;
where other symbols are used, they are explained at
the appropriate place:
- I: for shorter of the two spans at right

angles
A
b
b"
Effective width of slab
bf
Effective width of flange
bw
D
Breadth of web or rib

Overall depth of beam or slab or
diameter of column; dimension of a
rectangular column in the direction
urider consideration
Span in the direction in which

moments are determined. centre to
centre of supports
Span transverse to I" cen~ to centre

of supports
Df
E,
I, for the shorter of the continuous

, - spans
I'
Thickness of flange
Dead load
Effective depth of beam or slab
Bending moment'
Modular ratjo
-- Depth of compression reinforcement
Number of samples
frorti the highly compressed face
Modulus of elasticity of concrete
q,
- Calculated maximum bearing pressure
- DL ,d
-
d'
Area
Breadth of beam, or shorter dimensiori
of a rectangular column
11
Axial load on a compression member

IS 456: 2000
q"
Calculated maximum bearing pressure

of soil
1m
Radius
E cc
Spacing of stirrups or standard

deviation
ache -
Torsional moment
(fcc
Wall thickness
O',nc
O"sc
O'st
O'sv
'tbd
- Shear force
W
Total load
WL
Wind load
om
- Distributed load per unit area
.wd
Distributed dead load per unit area
w,
Distributed imposed load per unit area
Depth of neutral axis
Z
z
Modulus of section
'tc
'tc,illaJI -
Lever arm
a, J3 - Angle or ratio
1: •
1f
</>
Partial safety factor for load
12
Partial safety factor for material

Percentage reduction in moment
Creep strain of concrete
Permissible stress in concrete in
bending compression
Permissible stress in concrete in direct
compression
Permissible stress in _metal in direct
compression
Permissible stress in steel in
compression
Pennissible stress in steel in tension
Permissible tensile stress in shear
reinforcement
Design bond stress

Shear stress in concrete
Maximum shear stress in concrete
with shear reinforcement
Nominal shear stress
Diameterof bar
IS 456: 2000
SECTION. 2 MATERIALS, WORKMANSHIP,
INSPECTION AND TESTING
have no relation whatsoever with the characteristics

guaranteed by the Quality Marking as relevant to that
cement. Consumers are, therefore, advised to go by
the characteristics as given in the corresponding
Indian Standard Specification or seek specialist
advise to avoid any problem in concrete making and
construction.
5 MATERIALS
5.1 Cement
The cementused shall be any of the following and the
type selected should be appropriate for the intended
use:
a) 33 Grade ordinary Portland cement
conforming to IS 269
b)
43 Grade ordinary Portland cement

c)
53 Grade ordinary Portland cement
5.2 Mineral Admixtures

S.2.1 Pozzolanas
Pozzolanic materials conforming to relevant Indian
Standards may be used with the p.ermission of the
engineer-in-charge, provided unifOim blending with
d)
Rapid hardening Portland cement conforming

to IS 8041
e)
Portland slag cement conforming to IS 455
. f)
Portland pozzolana cement (fly ash based)

conforming to IS 1489 (Part I)
g)
Portland pozzolana cement (calcined clay

based) conforming to IS 1489 (Part 2)
h)
cement is ensured.
5.2.1.1 Fly ash (pulverized fuel ash)
Fly ash conforming to Grade 1 of IS 3812 may be

used as part replacement of ordinary Portland cement
provided uniform blending with cement is ensured.
5.2.1.2 Silieaj"me
Hydrophobic cement conforming to IS 8043
j)
Low heat Portland cement conforming to

IS 12600
k)Sulphate resisting Portland cement
confo~ming to IS 12330
Silica fume conforming to a standard approved by the

deciding authority may be used as part replacement of
cement provided uniform blending with the cement is
ensured.
Other combilllltions of Portland cement with mineral

admixtures (see 5.2) of quality conforming with
relevantlndian Standards laid down may also be used
in the manufacture of concrete provided that there are
satisfactory data 00 their suitability, such as
performance lest on concrete containing them.
5.1.1 Low heat Portland cement conforming to
IS 12600' sball be used with adequate precautions with
regard to removal of formwork, etc.
5.1.2 High alumina cement conforming to IS 6452 or
supersulphated cement conforming to IS 6909 may be
used onl:,/ undet special circumstances with the prior
approval ofthe engineer-In-charge. Specialist literature
may be consulted for guidance regarding the use of
these types of cements.
5.1.3 The attention of the engineers-in-charge and
users of cement is drawn to the fact that quality of
various cements mentioned in 5.1 is to be determined
on the basis of its conformity to the performance
characteristics given in the respective Indian Standard
Specification for that cement Any trade-mark or any
trade name indicating any special features not covered
in the standard or any qualification or other special
performance,:characteristics sometimes claimed/
indicated on the bags or containers or in advertisements
alongside the 'Statutory Quality Marking' or otherwise
NOTE-The silica fume (very fine. non~crystalline silicon

dioxide) is a by-product of the manufacture of silicon. fetrosilicon
or the like, from quartz and carbon in electric arc fumtice. It is
usually used in proportion of 5 to 10 percent of the Ceme~tcontent
ofa mix.
5.2.1~3 Rice husk ash
Rice husk ash giving required performance and

uniformity characteristics may be used with the
approval of the deciding authority.
. NOTE--:-Rice husk ash is produced by burning rice husk and
contain large proportion of silica. To achieve amofPhous state,
rice husk may be bumt at controlled temperature. It is necessary
to evaluate the product from a particular ~ource for performance
·and unifonnity s.ince it can range from being as deleterious as
,..ilt when incorporated in concrete. Water demand and drying
shrinkage .should be studied before using rice husk.
5.2.1.4 Metakaoline
Metakaoline having fineness between 700 to

900 m'/kg may be used as pozzolanic material in
concrete.
•
NOTE--Metakaoline is obtained by calcination of pure or
refined kaolintic clay at a temperature between 6500C and 850OC,
followed by grinding to ~hieve a fineness of700 to 900 m1-lkg.
The resulting material has high p~zzolanic~ty.
5.2.2 Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag
Ground granulated blast.furnace slag obtained by

grinding granulated blast furnace slag conforming to
IS 12089 toay be used as part replacement of ordinary
13
IS 456:2000
free from-injurious amounts
Portland cements provided uniform blending With

cement is ensured.
of oilSt acids, alkalis, salts,
sugar, organic materials or other substances that may

be deleterious to concrete or steel.
5.3 Aggregates
Potable water is generally considered satisfactory

for mixing concrete. As a guide the following
concentrations represent the maximum permissible
values:
Aggregates shall comply with the requirements of

IS 383. As far as possible preference shall be given to
natural aggregates.
a) To neutralize 100 ml sample of water, using

phenolphthalein as an indicator, it should not
require more than 5 ml of 0.02 normal NaOH.
The details of test are given in 8.1 of IS
3025 (Part 22).
5.3.1 Other types of aggregates such as slag and

crushed overburnt brick or tiIe, which may be found
suitable with regard to strength, durability of concrete
and freedom from hannful effects may be used for plain
concrete members, but such aggregates should not
contain more than 0.5 percent of sulphates as SO, and
should not absorb more than 10 percent of iheir own
mass of wate~.
b) To neutralize 100 rill sample of water, using

mixed indicator, it should not require more
than 25 ml of 0.02 normal H,SO4' The details
of test shall be a. given in 8 of IS 3025
(Part 23).
c) Pennissible limits for solids shall be as given
in Table I.
5.3.2 Heavy weight aggregates or light weight

aggregates such as bloated clay aggregates and sintered
fly ash aggregates may also be used provided the
engineer-in-charge is satisfied with the data on the
.
properties of concrete made with them.
5.4.1 In case of doubt regarding development of

strength, the suitability of water for making concrete
shall be ascertained by the compressive strength and
initial setting time tests specified in 5.4.1.2 and 5.4.1.3.
NOTE-Some of the provisions -of the code would require
modification when these aggregates are used; specialist literature
may be consulted for guidance.
5.4.1.1 The sample of water taken for testing shall

represent the water proposed to be. used for concreting,
The nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate should due account being paid to
seasonal variation. The
be as large as possible within the limIts specified but. sample shall not receive
any treatment be[oretesting
in no case greater than one-fourth of the minimulT!
other than that envisaged in the:regular supply' of water
thickness of the member, provided that the concrete proposed for use in concrete.
The sample shan be stored
can be placed without difficuliyso as to.·surround all . in a clean container
previously rinsed out with similar
reinforcement thoroughly and fill the corners of the
water.
form. For most work, 20 mm aggregate is suitable. 5.4.1,2 Average 28 days
compressive strength of at
Where there is no restriction to the flow of concrete least three 150 mm concrete
cubes prepared with IVater .
into sections, 40 mm or larger size may be pennitted.
proposed to be used shan not be less than 90 percent
In concrete elements with thin sections, closely spaced of the average. of
strength. of three similar concrete .
reinforcement or small cover, consideration should be cubes prepared with
distille<! water. The cubes shan
given to the use of 10 mm nominal maximum size.
be prepared, cured and testell in accordance with the
. .
Plums above 160 mm and up to any reasonable size .requirements oflS 516.'
may be used in plain concrete work up to a maxi~uIli 5.4.1.3 The initial setting
time of test blockrilade with
limit of :to. percent by volume. of concret.e.when
the appropriate cement and the water proposed to be.
specifically permitted by the engineer-in-charge. The used shall not be'le.s than
30 j"in and shall not differ
plullJs shall be distdbuted evenly and shall be' not clOser by ± 30 min from the
initial setting time of control
than 150 mm from the surface. .
. test block prepared with the same cement and distilled
IVater. The test blocks shall be prepared and tested in
5.3.3.1 For heavily reinforced concrete members as
accordance
with the requirements ofIS 4031 (P'1rt 5).
in the case of ribs of main beams, the nominal
5.3.3 Size ofAggregate
maximum size of the aggregate should usuaUy be

restricted to 5 mm less than the minimullJ clear distance
between the main bars or 5 mm less than the minimum
cover to the reinforcement whichever is smaller.
5.4.2 The pH value of water shall be not less than 6.
5.4.3 Sea Water

Mixing or curing of concrete .with sea water is not
recommended bee.ause of presence of harmful salts in
5.3.4 Coarse and fine aggregate shall be batched

separately. AII-in-aggl'egate may be used only where
specifically permitted by the engineer-in-charge.
sea water. Under unavoidable circumstances sea water

may be used for mixing or curing in plain concrete with
no embedded steel after having given due consideration
to possible disadvantages and precautions including use
of appropriate cement system.
5.4 Water
Water used for mixing and curing shall be clean and
14
IS 456: 2000
Table 1 Permissible Limit for Solids
(Clau"e 5.4)
SI
No.
Permb:sible Limit.
IS 3025 (Part 18)

IS 3025 (Part 18)
IS 3025 (Part 24)
IS 3025 (Part 32)
200 mgll
3000mgn
400 mgll
2000mgll
for p.oncrete not containing
Max
ii)
Organic
Inorganic
iii)
iv)
S111phates (as SO~)

Chlorides (as el)
i)
Tested as per
embedded steel and 500 mgll

v)
Suspended matter_
IS 3025 (Part 17)
5.4.4 Water found satisfactory for mixing is also

suitable for curing concrete. However, water used for
curing should not produce any objectionable stain or
unsightly deposit 'on the cOncrete surface. The presence
of tannic acid or iron compounds is objectionable.
5.5 Admixtures
for reinforced concrete work

2000 mgll
5.6.1 All reinforcement shall be free from loose mill

scales, loose rust and coats 'of painU;, oil, mud or any
other substances which may destroy or reduce bond.
Sand blasting or other treatment is recommended to
·clean reinforcement.
5.6.2 Special precautions like coating of reinforcement
may be required for reinforced concrete elements in

5.5.1 Admixture, if used ,shall comply with IS 9103.
exceptional cases and for rehabilitation of structures.
Previous experience with and data on such materials
Specialislliterature may be referred to in such cases:
should be considered in relation to the likely standards of "5.6.3 The modulus of
elasticity of sle'elshall be laken_
supervision and workmanship to the work being specified.
as 200 kNlmm'. The characteristic yield strength of
5.5.2 Admixtures should not impair durability of different steel shall be assumed
'us the minImum yield
concrele nor combine with the constiluenllo form
stress/0.2 percent proof stress specified in llierelevant
harmful compounds nodncrease lhe risk of corrosion' Indian Siandard.
of reinforcement.
5.7 l)torage of Materials
5.5.3' The workabilily,compressive strength and the
slump' loss of concrete with and without the use of , Storage of materials shall be
as describei! in IS 4082.
admixlures shall be 'established during the trial mixes
6 CONCRETE
before use of admixtures.
5.5.4 The-'relative density of liquid admixlures shall
be checked for each drum containing admixlures and
compared with the specified value before ,acceplance.
5.5.5 The chloride contenl of admixtures shall
be independently lested for each batch before
acceptance.
5.5.6 If two or more admixtures are used
simultaneously in the same concrete mix, data should
be obtained to assess their interaction 'and to ensure,
their compatibility.
6.1 Grades
The concrete shall be in gradesdesignaied as per
Table 2.
6.1.1 The characteristic strength is defined us the

strength of material, below which not, more than,
5 percenl of the test results are expected 10 fall,

6.1.2 Theininimum grade' of concrete for plain and"
reinforced concrete shall be as per Table 5:
'
6.1.3 Concrete of grades lower than those given in

Table 5 may be used for plain concrete constructions,
lean concrete, simple foundations, foundaiio~ for
masonry walls and other simple or lem'porary
5.6 Reinforcement
The reinforcement shall be any of Ihe following:
reinforced concrete construction.
a) ,Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars

conforming 10 IS 432 (Part I).
6.2 Properties of COllcrete

6.2.1 Increase of Strength wi(h Age
,
b) High strengthdefonned sleel bars conforming

to IS 1786. ' '
There is' normally a gain of strength beyond 28 days.

The quantum of increase depends upon the grade and
type of cement, curing and environmental conditions, '
etc. The design' should' be based on 28 'days cliaracleristic strength of concrete
unless there is a evidence to
c) , Hard-drawn steel wire fabric conforming 'to

IS 1566..
d) Struclural steel conforming to Grade A of
IS 2062.
15
'
IS 456: 2000
Table 2 Grades of Concrete
rT
E c ='5000 ""Jet
(Clause 6.1, 9.2.2, 15.1.1 and 36.1)

Group
G'r'ade Designation
where
Specified Charact(lristic
E, is the short term static modulus of elasticity in

N/mm'.
Actual measured values may differ by ± 20 percent
from the values obtained from the above expression.
Compressive Strength of
150 nun Cube at 28 Days in
N/mm2
(I)
(2)
(3)
Ordinary
MIO
M 15
M20
10
15
20
Standard
Concrete
M25
M30
M35
M40
M45
M50
M55
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
High
M60
M65
M70
M75
M80
60
65
70
75
80
Concrete
Strength
Concrete
6.2.4 Shrinkage
The total shrinkage of concrete depends upon the
constituents of concrete, size of the member and
environmental conditions. For a given humidity and
temperature, the total shrinkage of concrete is most
influenced by the total amount of water present in the
concrete at the time of mixing and, to a lesser extent,
by the cement content.
6.2.4.1 In the absence of test data, the approximate
value of the total shrinkage straiil for design may be
taken as 0.0003 (for more information, see IS 1343):
Noms
6.2.5 Creep of Concrete
1 In the designation of concrete mix M refers to the mix and the

number to the specified compressive strength of 150 mrn size
cub~ at 28 days, expressed in N/rnrn2 •
2 For concrete of compressive strength greater than M 55, design
parameters given in the standard may Itot be applicable and the
values may be obtained from specialized literatures and
experimental results.
Creep of concrete depends, in addition to the factors

listed in 6.2.4, on the stress in the concrete, age at
loading and the duration of loading. As long as the
stress in concrete does not exceed one-third of its
characteristic compressive strength, creep may be
assumed to be proportional to the stress.
justify a higher strength for a particular structure due to

age.
6.2.S.Un the absence of experimental data and detailed

information on the effect ofth~ variables, the ultimate
creep strain may be estimated from the following
values of creep coefficient (that is, ultimate creep strain!
long span
elastic strain at the age of loading);
structure, it is advisable to, detennine actual creep
strain, likely to take place:
6.2.1.1 . For concrete of grade M 30 and above, the

rate of increase of compressive strength with age shall
be based on actual investigations.
for
6.2.1.2 Where members are subjected to lowerdirect

load during construction, they should be checked for
stresses resulting from combination of direct load and .
bending during construction.
6.2.2 Tensile Strength of Concrete
Age at Loading
Creep Coefficient
7 days
28 days
. 1 year
2.2
1.6
1.1
The flexural and splitting tensile strengths shall be

obtained as described in IS 516 and 185816
NOTE-The ultimate creep strain, estimated as described above
respectively.· When the designer wishes to use an
does not include the elastic strain.
estimate of the tensile strength from the compressive
. 6.2.6 Thermal Expansion
strength, the following formula may be used:
The coefficient ofthermal expansion depends on riature
Flexural strength, f" = 0.7 {i; N/mm'
of cement, the aggregate, the oement cbntent, the
where1" is the characteristic cube compressive strength relative humidity and the
size of sections, The value
of concrete in N/mm'.
of coefficient of thermal expansion for co~cr~te with
different aggregates may be taken as below:
6.2.3 Elastic Deformation
The modulus of elasticity is primarily influenced by
the elastic properties of the aggregate and to a lesser
extent by the conditions of curing alld age of the
concrete, the mix proportions and the type of cement.
The modulus of elasticity is normally related to the
compressive strength of concr~te.
Tjlpe of Aggregate
Quartzite
Sandstone
Granite
Basalt
Limestone
6.2.3.1 The modulus of elasticity of concrete can be

assumed as follows:
16
Coefficient of Thermal
Expansionfor Conerete/"C
1.2 to 1.3 X 10-5

0.9 to 1.2 X 10-5
0.7 to 0.95 X 10"
0.8 to 0.95 x 1O~
0.6 to 0.9 x 10"
IS 456: 2000
7 WORKABILITY OF CONCRETE
7.1 The concrete mix proportions chosen should be
be compacted with the means available. Suggested

ranges of workability of concrete measured in
accordance with IS \199 are given below:
such that the concrete is of adequate workabilily for

the placing conditions of the concrete and can properly
Degree of
Slump
Workability
(mm)
(I)
(2)
(3)
Blinding concrete;
Shallow sections;
Pavements using pavers
Mass concrete;
Lightly reinforced
sections in slabs,
beams, walls, columns;
Floors;
. Hand placed pavements;
Canal lining;
Strip footings
Heavily reinforced
". sections in slabs,
Slipform work;
Pumped concrete
Trench fill;
In·situ piling
Tremie concrete
Very low
See 7.1.1
Low
25-75
Medium
50-iOO
Placing Conditions
75-100
High
100-150
Very high
See 7.1.2
NOTE-For most of the placing conditiOns, internal vibrators (needle vibrators) are
suitable. The diameter of the needle Shall be
determined based on the density and spacing of reinforcement bars and thickness of
sections. For trem.ie concrete, 'vibrators are not
'J.
required to be used (see also 13.3).
7.1.1 In the 'very loW' category of workability where

strict control is necessary, for example pavement
quality concrete, measurement of workability by
determination of compacting factor will be more
appropriate than slump (see IS 1199) and a value of
compacting fuctor of 0.75 to 0.80 is suggested.
a suitably low permeability is achieved by having an

adequate cement content, sufficiently low free waterl
cement ratio, by ensuring complete compaCtion of the
concrete, and by adequate cming.
The factors influencing durability include:
a)
7.1.2 In the 'very high' category of workability,
the environment;
measurement of workability by determination of flow

will be appropriate (see IS 9103).
b) the cover to embedded steel;
8 DURABILITY OF CONCRETE
d) the cement ·content and waterlcement ratio of

the concrete;
c) the type and quality of constituent materials;
8.1' General
e) workmanship, to ohtain full compaction and

efficient curing; and
A durable concrete is one that performs satisfactorily

in the working environment during its anticipated
exposure conditions during service. The materials and
mix proportions specified and used should be such as
to maintain its integrity and, if applicable, to protect
embedded metal from corrosion.
8.1.1 One of the main characteristics influencing the
durability of concrete is its permeability to the ingress
of water, oxygen, carbon dioxide, chloride, sulphate and
other potentially deleterious substances. Impermeabilily
is governed by the constituents and workmanship used
in making the concrete. With normal-weight aggregates
f)
the shape and size of the member.
The degree of exposure anticipated for the concrete

during its service life together with other relevant
factors relating to mix composition, workmanship,
design and detailing should be considered. The
concrete mix to provide adequate durabiJily under these
conditions shOUld be chosen taking account of the
accuracy of CUiTent testing regimes for control and
compliance as described in this standard.
17
IS 456: 2000
8.2 Requirements for Durability
8.2.2.2 Abrasive.
8.2.1 Shape and Size of Member
Specialist literatures may be referred to for durability

requirements of concrete surfaces exposed to abrasive
action, for example, in case of machinery and metal tyres.
The shape or design details of exposed structures

should be such as to promote good drainage of water
and to avoid standing pools and rundown of water.
Care should also be taken to minimize any cracks that
may collect or transmit water. Adequate curing is
essential to avoid the harmful effects of early loss of
moisture (see 13.5).Member profiles and their
intersections with other members shall be designed and
detailed in a way to ensure easy flow of concrete and
proper compaction during concreting.
8.2.2.3 Freezingand thawing

Where freezing and thawing actions under wet
conditions exist, enhanced durability can be obtained
by the use of suitable air entraining admixtures. When
concrete lower than grade M 50 is used under these
conditions, the mean total air content by volume of
the fresh concrete at the time .of delivery into the
construction should be:
Concrete is more vulnerable to deterioration due to

chemical or climatic attack when it is in thin sections,
in sections under hydrostatic pressure from one side
only, in partially immersed sections and at corners and
edges of elements. The life of the structure can be
lengthened by providing extra cover to steel, by
chamfering the corners or by using circular crosssections or by using surface
coatings which prevent or
reduce the ingress of water, carbon dioxide or
aggressive chemicals.
Tabl e 4 gives recommendations for the type of cement,

maximum free water/cement ratio and min.imum
cement content, which are required at different sulphate
concentrations in near-neutrai ground' water _.having
pHof6 to 9.
For the very high sulphate concentrations in ~Iass 5
conditions, some form of lining such as polyethylene
or polychloroprene sheet; or surface coating based on
asphalt, chlorinated rubber, epoxy; or polyurethane'
materials should also be used to prevent aCcess by the
sulphate solution.
(Clauses 8.2.2.1 and 35.3.2)

Exposure Conditions
(2)
(3)
i)
Mild
ii)
Moderate
iii)
Severe
iv)
Very severe
v)
Extreme
5±1
4±!
8.2.2.4 Exposure to sulphate attack
Table 3 Environmental Exposnre Conditions
Environment
20
Since air entrainment reduces the strength, suitable

adjustments may be made in the mix design for
achieving required strength.
8.2.2.1 General environment

The general environment to which the concrete will
he exposed during its working life is classified into
five levels of severity, that is, mild, moderate, severe,
very severe and extreme as described in Table 3.
SJ No.
Entrained Air
Percentage
40
8.2.2 Exposure Conditions
(I)
Nominal Maximum Size

Aggregate
(mm)
Concrete surfaces protected against

weather or aggressive conditions, except
those situated in coastal area.
Concrete surfaces sheltered from severe
rain or freezing whilst wet
Concrete exposed to condensation and rain
Concrete continuously under water
Concrete in contact or buried under non·
. aggressive soil/ground water
Concrete surfaces sheltered from
saturated salt air in coastal area
Concrete surfaces exposed to severe
rain. alternate wetting and drying or
occasional freezing whilst wet or severe
condensation.
Concrete completely immersed in sea water
Concrete exposed to coastal environment
Concrete surfaces ex posed to sea water
spray. corrosiVe fumes or severe freezing
conditions whilst wet
Concrete in contact with or buried
under aggressive sub·soiVground water
Surface of members in tidal zone
Members in direct contact with liquidl
solid· aggressive chemicals
8.2.3 Requirement of Concrete Cover

8.2.3.1 The protection of the steel in concrete against
corrosion depends upon an adequate thickness of good
quality concrete .
8.2.3.2 The nominal cover to the reinforcement shall
be provided as per 26.4.
8.2.4 Concrete Mix Proportions
8.2.4.1 General
The free water-cement ratio is an important factor in
governing the durability of concrete and should aI ways
be the lowest value. Appropriate values for minimum
cement content and the maximum free water-cement
ratio are given in Table 5 for different exposure
conditions. The minimum cement content and
maximum water-cement ratio apply to 20 mm nominal
maximum size aggregate. For other sizes of aggregate
they should be changed as given in Table 6.
18
IS 456: 2000
8.2.4.2 Maximum cement content
Cement content not including fly ash and ground
granulated blast furnace slag in excess of 450 kglm'
should not be used unless special consideration has
been given in design ta the increased risk af cracking

due ta drying shrinkage in. thin sectians, ar ta early
thermal cracking and ta the increased risk af damage
due ta alkali silica reactians.
Table 4 Requirements for Concrete Exposed to Sulphate Attack

(Clauses 8.2.2.4 and 9. 1.2)
Concentration of Sulphates,
Class
SI
Expressed a<; SOJ
No.
In ~oi1
Toial SO~
SO;in
2:1 Water:
Soil Extract
Type of Cement
Dense, Fully Compacted Concrete.

Made with 20 mm Nominal
Maximum Size Aggregates
Complying with IS 383
In Ground
Water
•
Maximum
Minimum
Cement
Face Water-
Content
Cement
Ratio
kg/m1
(I)
(2)
i)
Percent
gil
gil
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Truces
Less than
Less than
280
0.55
« 0.2)
1.0
0.3
Ordinary Portland
cement or Portland
330
0.50
310
0.50
33P
0.50
350
0.45
Supersulphated
or sulphate
resisting
Portland cement
370
0.45
Sulphate resisting
Portland cement or
supersulphated cement
with protective coatings
400
slag cement or
Portland pozzolana
cement
2
H)
0.2 to
0.5
1.0to
1.9
0.3 to
1.2
Ordinary Portland
cement Of
Portland sIng
celucntor
Portland
pozzolana cement
Supersulphated
cemcpt or
sulphate resisting
Portland cement
iii)
iv)
4
0.5 to
1.9 to
1.2 to
1.0
3.1
2.5
1.0 to
2.0
v)
3.1 to
5.0
2.5 to
5.0
More than
More than
More than
2.0
5.0
5.0
Supersulphated
cement or
sulphate resisting
Portland cement
Portland pozzolana
cement or Portland
slag cement
0.40
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Cement content given in this table is irrespective of grades of cement.
Use of supersulphated cement is generally restricted where the prevailing
temperature is above 40°C.
Supersulphated cement gives an acceptable life provided that the concrete is dense
and prepared with a water~cement ratio of 0.4 or
less, in mineral acids, down to pH 3.5.
The cement contents given in col 6 of this table are the minimum recommended. For
SOl contents near the upper limit of any class,
cement contents above these minimum are advised.
For severe conditions, such as thin sections under hydrostatic pressure on one side
only and sections partly immersed, considerations
should be given to a further reduction of watervcelnent ratio.
Portlaild slag cement conforming to IS' 455 with slag content more thun 50 percent
exhibits better sulphate resisting properties.
Where chloride is encountered along with sulphates in soil or ground Water.
ordinary Portland cement with ClA content from 5 to 8
percent shall be desirable to be used in concrete, insteadof sulphate resisting
cement. Altematively, Portland slag cement conforming
to IS 455 having more than 50 percent slag or a blend of ordinary Portland cement
and slag may be used provided sufficient information
is available on perfonnance of such blended cements in these conditions.
19
IS 456: 2000
expansion and di~ruption of concrete. To prevent this,

the total water-soluble sulphate content of the concrete
mix, expressed as SO" shOUld not exceed 4 percent by
mass of the cement in the mix. The sulphate content
should be calculated as the total from the various
constituents of the mix.
The 4 percent limit does not apply to concrete made
with supersulphated cemen( complying with IS 6909.
8.2.5 Mix Constituents

8.2.5.1 General
For concrete to be durable, careful selection ofthe mix
and materials is necessary, so that deleterio-us

constituents do not exceed the Jimits.
8.2.5.2 Chlorides in concrete

Whenever there is chloride in concrete there is an
increased risk of corrosion of embedded metal. The
higher the chloride content, or if subsequently exposed
to warm moist conditions, the greater the risk of
corrosion. All constituents may contain chlorides and
concrete may be contaminated by chlorides from the
external environment. To minimize the chances of
deterioration of concrete from harroful chemical salts,
the levels of such harmful salts in concrete coming
from concrete materials, that is, cement, aggregates
water and admixtures, as well as by diffusion from the
environment should be limited. The total amount of
chloride content <as CI) .in the concrete at the time of
placing shall be as given in Table 7.
8.2.5.4 Alkali-aggregate reaction

Some aggregates containing particuJar varieties of
silica may be susceptible to attack by alkalis <Nap
and K,0) originating from cement or other sources,
producing an expansive reaction which can cause
cracking and disruption of concrete. Damage to
concrete from this reaction will norroally only occur
when all the following are present together: .
a) A high moisture level, within the concrete;
b) A cement with high alkali content, or another
source of alkali;
c) Aggregate containing an alkali reactive
constituent.
Where the service records of particular cementl
aggregate combination are well establ'shed, and do not
include any instances of cracking due to alkaliaggregate reaction, no further
precautions should be
necessary. When the materials are unfamiliar,
precautions should take one at more ortbe following
forms:
a) Use of non-reactive aggregate from alternate
sources.
The total acid soluble chloride content should be
calculated from the mix proportions and the measured
chloride contents of each of the constituents. Wherever
possible, the total chloride content of the concrete
should be determined.
8.2.5.3 Sulphates in concrete

Sulphates are present in most cements and in some
aggregates; excessive amounts of water-soluble
sulphate from these or other mix constituents can cause
Table 5 Minimllm Cemen! Content, Maximum Water-Cement Ratio and Minimum Grade of
Concrete .
for Different Exposures with Normal Weight Aggregates of 20 mm Nominal Maximllm
Size
(Clauses 6.1.2, 8.2.4.1 and 9.1.2)
SI
No.
Expo..,ure
Plain Concrete
I)
Reinforced Concrete
~
Minimum
Cement
Content
kg/m)
Maximum
Free WaterCement Ratio
Minimum
Grade of
Concrete
Minimum
Cement
Content
kg/ml
Maximum
Free WaterC~ment Ratio
Minimum
Grade of
Concrete
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(?)
(8)
j)
Mild
220
0.60
300
0.5'''
M20
iii)
Moderate
240
0.60
M 15
300
05()
M25
iii)
Severe
250
0.50
M20
320
M30
iv)
Very severe
260
0.45
M20
340
Extreme
280
0040
M]5
~60
OA5
OA5
OAO
v)
M35
M40
NOTES
1 Cement content prescribed in this table is irrespective ofthe grades of cement
and it is inclusive of additions mentioned in S.2. The
additions such as fly ash or ground granulated blast furnace slag may be taken
intI) account in the concrete composition with respect to
the cement content and water-cement ralio if the suitability is established and as
long as the maximum amounts taken into account do
not exceed the limit of pozzolona and slag specified.in IS 1489 (Part I) and IS 455
respectively.
2 Minimum grade for plain concrete undel' mild exposure condition is not specified.
20
IS 456: 2000
Table 6 Adjustments to Minimum Cement
Contents fo. Agg<egates Other Than 20 mm
Nominal Maximum Size
evaporation may cause serious concentrations of salts

with subsequent deterioration, even where the original
salt content of the soil or water is not high.
(Clause 8.2.4.1)
SI
No.
Nominal Maximum Adjustments to Minimum Cement

Contents in Table 5
Aggregate Siztl
kg/m3
mm
(I)
(2)
(3)
i)
10
+40
ii)
20
iii)
40
-30
(Clause 8.2.5.2)
Type or Use of Concrete
No.
(I)
Maxbnum Total
Acid Soluble
Chloride Content
Expressed as kglm 3 of
Concrete
(2)
Concrete containing metal and

steam cured at elevated tempe-
i)
(3)
0.4
rature and pre-stressed concrete

it)
iii)
Reinforced concrete Of plain concrete

containing embedded metal
Concrete not containing embedded
metal Of any material requiring
protection from chloride
8.2.6.2 Drainage
At sites where alkali concentrations are high or may

become very high, the ground water should be lowered
by drainage so that it will not come into direct contact
with the concrete.
Table 7 Limits of Chloride Content of Concrete
SI
NOTE-Guidance regarding requirements for concrete exposed

to sulphate nltack is given in 8.2.2.4.
0.6
3.0
b) Use of low alkali ordinary Portland cement

having total alkali content not more Ihan 0.6
percent (as Na20 equivalent).
Further advantage can be obtained by use of fly
ash (Grade 1) conforming to IS 3812 or
granulated blastfurn.ce slag conforming to
IS 12089 as part replacement of ordinary
Portland cement (having total alkali content as
Na 0 equivalent not more than 0.6 percent),
pr~vided fly ash content is at least 20 percent·
or slag content is at least 50 percent.
c) Measures to reduce the degree of saturation of
the concrete during service such as use of
impenneable membranes.
d) Limiting the cement content in the concrete mix
and thereby limiting total alkali contenl in the
concrete mix. For more guidance specialist
literatures may be referred.
Additional protection may be obtained by the use of
chemically resistant stone facing or a layer of plaster
of Paris covered with suitable fabric, such as jute
thoroughly impregnated with bituminous material.
8.2.7 Compaction, Finishing and Curing

Adequate compaction without segregation should be
ensured by providing suitable workability and by
employing appropriate placing and compacting
equipment and procedures. Full compaction is
particularly important in the vicinity of construction
and movement joints and of embedded water bars and
reinforcement.
Good finishing practices are essential for durable
concrete.
Overworking tbe surface and the addition of water!
cement to aid in finishing should be avoided; the
reSUlting laitance will have impaired strength and
durability and will be particularly V\llnerable to •
freezing and thawing under wet conditions. .
It is essential to use proper and adequate curing
techniques to reduce the permeability ofthe concrete.
and enhance its durability by extending the hydration
of the cement, particularly in its surface zone
(see 13.5).
8.2.8 Concrete in Sea-water
Concrete in sea-water or exposed directly along the

sea-coast shall be at least M 20 Grade in the. case of
plain concrete and M 30 in case of reinforced concrete.
The use of slag or pozzolana cement is advantageous
under such conditions.
8.2.8.1 Special attention shall be given to the design
of the mix to obtain the densest possible concrete; slag,
broken brick, soft limestone, soft sandstone, or other
porous or weak aggregates shall not be used.
8.2.6 Concrete in Aggressive Soils and Water
8.2.8.2 As far as possible, preference shall be given to

precast members unreinforced, wen-cured and
hardened, without sharp corners, and having trowelsmooth finished surfaces free
Irom crazing, cracks or
other defects; plastering should be avoided.
8.2.6.1 General
The destructive action of aggressive waters on concrete

is progressive. The rate of deterioration decreases as
the concrete is made stronger and more impenneable,
and increases as the salt content of the water increases.
Where structures are only partial1y immersed or are in
contact with aggressive soils or waters on one side only,
8.2.8.3 No constructionjoinl< shal1 be allowed within

600 mm below low water-level or within 600 mm of
the upper and lower planes of Wave action. Where
21
IS 456: 2000
a) Type of aggregate,
unusually severe conditions or abrasion are anticipated,

such parts of the work shall be protected by bituminous
or silica-fluoride coatings or stone facing bedded with
bitumen.
b) Maximum cement content, and

c) Whether an admixture shall or shall not be
used and the type of admixture and the
condition of use.
8.2.S.4 In reinforced concrete structures, care shall be

taken to protect the reinforcement from exposure to
saline atmosphere during storage, fabrication and use.
II may be achieved by treating the surface of
reinforcement with cement wash or by suitable
methods.
9.2 Design Mix Concrete

9.2.1 As the guarantor of quality of concrete used in
the construction, the constructor shall carry out the mix
design and the mix so designed (not the method of
design) shall be approved by the employer within the
limitations of parameters and other stipulations laid
down by this standard.
9 .CONCRETE MIX PROPORTIONING

9.1 Mix Proportion
9.2.2 The mix shall be designed to produce the grade

of concrete having the required workability and a
characteristic strength not less than appropriate values
given in Table 2. The target mean strength of concrete
mix should be equal to the characteristic strength plus
1.65 times the standard deviation.
The mix proportions shall be selected to ensure the

workability of the fresh concrete and when concrete is
hardened, it shall have the required strength, durability
and surface finish.
9.1.1 The determination ofthe proportions of cement,
aggregates and water to attain the required strengths
shall be made as follows:
9.2.3 Mix design done earlier not prior to one year

may be considered adequate for later work provided
there is no change in source and the quality of the
a) By designing the concrete mix; such concrete

shall be called 'Design mix concrete', or
materials.
b) By adopting nominal concrete mix; such

concrete shall be called 'Nominal mix concrete'.
9.2.4 Standard Deviation
Design mix concrete is preferred to nominal mix. If

design mix concrete cannot be used for any reason'on
the work for grades of M 20 or lower, nominal mixes
may be used with the permission of engineer-in-charge,
which, however, is likely to involve a higher cement
The standard deviation for each grade of concreie shall

be calculated, separately.
9.2.4.1 Standard deviation based on test strength of

sample
.
a) Number of test res!dts of samples-T)le total
number of test strength of samples reqUired to
constitute an acceptable record for calculation
of standard deviation shall be not less than 30..
Attempts should be made to obtain the 30
samples, as early as possible, when amix is used
for the first time.
.
content.
9.1.2 Information Required

In specifying a particular grade of concrete, the
foJlowing information shall be included:
a) Type of mix, that is, design mix concrete or
nominal mix concrete;
b) In case of significant changes in concrete-
b) Grade designation;
When significant changes are made in the

production of concrete batches (for example
changes in the materials used, mix design,
equipment or technical control), the standard
deviation value shall be separately calculated
for such batches of concrete.
c) Type of cement;
d) Maximum nominal size of aggregate;
e) Minimum cement content (for design mix
concrete);
f)
Maximum water-cement ratio;
c) Standard deviation to be brought up to dateThe calculation of the standard

deviation shaH
be brought up to date after every change of mix
design.
g) Workability;
h) Mix proportion (for nominal mix concrete);
j) Exposure conditions as per Tables 4 and 5;
k) Maximum temperature of concrete at the time
of placing;
9.2.4.2 Assumed standard deviation

Where sufficient test results for a particular grade of
concrete are not available, the value of standard
deviation given in Table 8 rriay be assumed for design
of mix in the first instance. As soon as the results of
samples are available, actual calculated standard
deviation shaH be used and the mix designed properly.
m) Method of placing; and

n) Degree of supervision.
9.1.2.1 In appropriate circumstances, the following
additional information may be specified:
22
IS 456: 2000
However, when adequate past records for a similar grade
. existaildjustify to the designer a value of standard deviation
different from that shownin Table 8, it slmll be permissible
to use that value.
Table 8 Assumed Standard Deviation

(Clnu.« 9.2.4.2 and Table 11)
Assumed Stand8l'd
Deviation
Grade of
Concrete
N/mm2
MIO
MIS
3.5
M20
M2S
4.0
M30
M35
5.0
M40
M4S
M50
NOTE-The ..hove vOllues correspond to the site control having
proper storage of cement; weigh batching of all materials; controlled
addition of water; regular cbec~ing of all mate.,.;als. aggregate
grndings and moisture content; and periodical checking of.
workability and strength. Where there is deviation from the above
the values given in the above tabll? shall be increased by tN/nnw.
9.3 Nominal Mix Concrete

Nominal mix concrete may be used for concrete of
M 20 or lower. The proportions of materials for
nominal mix concrete shall be in accordance with·
Table 9.
'11.3.1. The cement content of the mix specified in
Table 9 f6rony nomillal1!lix shall be proportionately
increased if the quantity of water in a mix has to he
increased to overcome the difficulties of placement and
compacti(;n, so that the water-cementmtio as specified
is not exceeded.
10 PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE
10.1 Quality Assurance Measnres
10.1.1 In order that the properties of the completed
structure be consistent with the requirements and the
assumptions made during the planning and the design,
adequate quality assurance measures shall be taken.
The construction should result in satisfactory strength,
serviceability and long term durability so as to lower .
the overall life-cycle cost. Quality assurance in
construction activity relates to proper design. use of
adequate materials and components to be supplied by
the producers, proper workmanship in the execution
of works by the contractor and ultimately proper care
during the use of structure including timely
maintenance and repair by the owner.
10.1.2 Quality assurance measures are both technical
and organizational. Some common cases should be
specified in a general Quality Assurance Plan which
shall identify the key elements necessary to provide
fitness of the structure and the means by which they
are to be provided and measured with the overall
purpose to provide confidence that the realized project
will work satisfactorily in service fulfilling intended
needs. The job of quality control and quality assurance
would involve quality audit of both the inputs as well
as the outputs. Inputs are in the form of materials for
concrete; workmanship in all stages of batching,
mixing, transportation, placing, coml'action and
curing; and the related plant, machinery and
equ{pments;resulting in the output in the form of
concrete in place. To ensure proper performance, it is
necessary that each step in concreting which will he
covered by the ·next step is inspected as the work
proceeds (see also 17).
Table 9 Proportions for Nominal Mix Concrete

(Ciau3es 9.3 and 9.3.1)
Total Quantity of Dry Aggregat.. by Mass per 50 kg of
Cement, to be Taken as the Sum
of the Individual Masses of
Fine and Coal'Se Aggregates, kg,
Mux
Proportion of Fine
Aggregate to Coarse
Aggregate (by Mass)
SO kg of Cement, Max
(I)
(2)
(3)
(4)
M5
M7.5
M 10
ROO
625
480
Genernlly 1:2 butsubjec! to

anupperlimitofl:J1/1 and a
tower limit of 1:2'/1
60
45
34
Grade of
Concrete
I
.
Quantity of Water per
MIS
m
MW
~
~
NOTE-The proportion of the flne to coarse aggregates should be adjusted from upper
limit to lower limit progreSsively as the grading
of fme aggregates becomes finer and the maximum size of coatse aggregate becomes
larger. Graded coarse aggregate shall be used.
Example
For an averoge grading of fine aggregate (that is, 'ZQne II of Table 4 of IS 383),
the proportions shall be 1: 11/ 1, 1:2 arid 1:2 1/ 2 for
maximum size of aggregates 10 rom. 20 mm and 40 rom respectively.
23
IS 456: 2000
measured and within ± 3 percent of the quantity of
aggregate, admixtures and water being measured.
10.1.3 Each party involved in the realization of a

project should establish and implement a Quality
Assurance Plan, for its participation in the project.
Supplier's and subcontractor's activities shall be
covered in the plan. The individual Quality Assurance
Plans shall fit into the general Quality Assurance Plan.
A Quality Assurance Plan shall define the tasks and
responsibilities of all persons involved, adequate
control and checking procedures, and the organization
and maintaining adequate documentation of the
building process and its results. Such documentation
should generally include:
a) test reports and manufacturer's certificate for
materials, concrete mix design details;
b) pour cards for site organization and clearance
for, concrete placement;
c) record of site inspection of workmanship, field
tests;
d) non-conformance reports, change orders;
e) quality control charts; and
1') statistical analysis.
10.2.3 Proportion/l'ype and grading of aggregates shall

be made by trial in such a way so as to obtain densest
possible concrete. All ingredients of the concrete
should be used by mass only.
10.2.4 Volume batching may be allowed only where
weigh-batching is not practical and provided accurate
bulk densities of materials to be actually used in
concrete have earlier been established. Allowance for
bulking shall be made in accordance with IS 2386
(Part 3). The mass volume relationship should be
checked as frequently as necessary, the frequency for
the given job being determined by engineer-in-charge
to ensure that the specified grading is maintained.
10.2.S It is important to maintain the water-cement
ratio constant at its correct value. To this end, detennination of moisture
contents in both fine and coarse
aggregates shall be made as frequently as possible, the
frequency for a given job being determined by the
engineer-in-charge according to weather conditions.
The amount of the added water shall be adjusted to
compensate for any observed variations in the moisture
contents. For the determination of moisture content
in the aggregates, IS 2386 (Part 3) may be referred to.
To allow for the variation in mass of aggregate due to
NOTE---Quality control charts are recommended wherever the

concrete is in continuous production over considemble period.
10.2 Batching
To avoid confusion and error in batching, consideration
variation in their moisture content. suitable adjustments
should be given to using the smallest practical number

of different concrete mixes on any site Of in anyone
plant. In batching concrete, the quantity of both cement
and aggregate shall be determined by mass; admixture,
if solid, by mass; liquid admixture may however be
measured in volume or mass; water shall be weighed
or measured by volume in a calibrated tank (see also
IS 4925).
in the masses of aggregates shall also be made. In the

absence of exact data, only in the case of nominal
mixes, the amount of surface water may be estimated
from the values given in Table 10.
.
Table 10 Surface Water Carried by Aggregate
(CIa""e 10.2.5)
SI
Ready-mixed concrete supplied by ready-mixed

concrete plant shall be preferred. For large and medium
project sites the concrete shall be sourced from readymixed concrete plants or from
on site or off site
batching and mixing plants (see IS 4926).
Aggregate
No.
(I)
10.2.1 Except where it can be shown to the satisfaction

of the engineer-in-charge that supply of properly
graded aggregate of uniform quality can be maintained
over a period of work, the grading of aggregate should
be controlled by obtaining the coarse aggregate in
different sizes and blending them 'in the right
proportions when required, the different sizes being
stocked in separate stock-piles. The material should
be stock-piled for several hours preferably a day before
use. The grading of coarse and fine aggregate should
be checked as frequently as possible, the frequency
for a given job being determined by the engineer-incharge to ensure that the
specified grading is
maintained.
(2)
Approximate Quantity of Surface

Water
Pe~ent by ~nss ..
1Im~ ,
(3)
(4)
i)
Very wet sand
75
120
ii)
Moderately wet sand
5.0
80
iii)
Moist sand
2.5
40
iv)
llMoist gravel or crushed rock 1.25·2.5
20-40
I) Coarser the aggregate. less tlle water it will carry,
10.2.6 No substitutions in materials used on the work

or alterations in the established proportions, except as
pelmitted in 10.2.4 and 10.2.5 shall be made without
additional tests to show that the quality and strength
of concrete are satisfactory.
10.3 Mixing
Concrete shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer. The
mixer should comply with IS 1791 and IS 12119. The
mixers shall be fitted with water measuring (metering)
devices. The mixing shall be continued until there is a
uniform distribution of the materials and the mass is
10.2.2 The accuracy ofthe measuring equipment shall

be within ± 2 percent of the quantity of cement being
24
IS 456,2000
uniform in colour and consistency. If there is
segregation after unloading from the mixer, the
concrete should be remixed.
10.3.1 For guidance, the mixing time shall be at least
2 min. For other types of more efficient mixers,
manufacturers recommendations shall be followed;
fo[hydrophobic cement it may be decided by the
engineer-in-charge.
10.3.2 Workability should be checked at frequent
intervals (see IS 1199).
10.3.3 Dosages of retarders, plasticisers and
superplasticisers shall be restricted to 0.5, 1.0 and 2.0
percent respectively by weight of cementitious
materials and unless a higher value is agreed upon
between the manufacturer and the constructor based
, on performance test.
n.3 Stripping Time

Forms shall not be released until the concrete has
achieved a strength of at least twice the stress to which
the concrete may be subjected at the time of removal
of formwol'k. The strength referred to shall be that of
concrete using the same cement and aggregates and
admixture, if any, with the same proportions and cured
under conditions of temperature and moisture similar

t() those existing on the work.
11.3.1 While the above criteria of strength shall be the
guiding factor for removal of fmmwork, ill normal
circumstances where ambient temperature does not fall
below 15°C and where ordinary Portland cement is used
and adequate curing is done, following striking period
may deem to satisfy the guideline given in 11.3:
Type of Formwork
11 FORMWORK
11.1 General
The form work shall be designed and constructed so
as to remain sufficiently rigid during placing and
compaction of concrete, and shall be such as to prevent
loss of slurry from tbe concrete. For further details
regarding design, detailing, etc, reference may be made
to IS 14687. The tolerances on the shapes, lines and
dimensions shown in the drawing shall be within the
limits given below:
+ 12
a) Deviation from specified
_ 6 mm
dimensions of cross-section
of columns and beams
b) Deviation from dimensions
of footings
I) Dimensions in plan
2) Eccentricity
3) Thickness
Minimum Period
Before Striking
Formwork
a) Vertical formwork to columns,

walls, beams
16-24 h
b) Soffit fonnwork to slabs

(Props to be refixed
immediately after removal
of fonnwork)
3 days
c) Soffit fonnwork to beams

(Props to be refixed
immediately after removal'
of formwork)
,
d) Props to slabs:
7 days
1) Spanning up to 4.5 ni
2) Spanning over 4,5 m
7 days
14 days
e) Props to beams and arches:

+50 mm
-12
0.02 times the
widthofthe footing in the direc-
tion of deviation
but not more than
50mm
± 0.05 times the
specified thickness
I) Spanning up to 6 m
2) Spanning over 6 m
14'days
21 days
For other cements and lower temperature, the

stripping time recommended above may be suitably
modified.
11.3.2 The number of props left under, their sizes and

disposition shall be such as to be able to safely carry
the full dead load of the slab, beam or arch as the case
may be together with any live load likely to oCCur
during curing or further construction.
These tolerances apply to concrete dimensions only, and

not to positioning of vertical reinforcing steel or dowels.
n.3.3 Where the sbape of the element is sucb that the

fonnwork has re-entrant angles, the fonnwork shall be
11.2 Cleaning and Thealment of Formwork

All rubbish, particularly, chippings, shavings and
sawdust shall be removed from the interior ofthe fonns
before the concrete is placed. The face of formwork
in contact with the concrete shall be cleaned and treated
with form release agent. Release agents should be
applied so as to provide a thin unifonn coating to the
forms without coating the reinforcement.
removed as soon as possible after the concrete has set,

to avoid shrinkage cracking occurring due to the
restraint imposed.
12 ASSEMBLY OF REINFORCEMENT
12.1 Reinforcement shan be bent and fixed in
accordance with procedure specified in IS 2502. The
high strength defonned steel bars should not be re-bent
25
IS 456: 2000
or straightened without the approval of engineer-incharge.
steel bars are bent aside at construction joints and

afterwards bent back into their original positions, care
should be taken to ensure that at no time is the radius
of the bend less than 4 bar diameters for plain mild
steel or 6 bar diameters for deformed bars. Care shall
also be taken when bending back bars, to ensure that
the concrete around the bar is not damaged beyond
the band.
Bar hending schedules shall be prepared for all
reinforcement work.
12.2 All reinforcement shall be placed and maintained
in the position shown in the drawings by providing
proper cover blocks, spacers, supporting bars, etc.
12.2.1 Crossing bars should not be tack-welded for
assembly of reinforcement unless permitted by
engineer-in-charge.
12.6 Reinforcement should be placed and tied in such

a way that concrete placement be possible without
segregation ofthe mix. Reinforcement placing should
allow compaction by immersion vibrator. Within the
concrete mass, different types of metal in contact
should be avoided to ensure that bimetal corrosion does
not take place.
12.3 Placing of Reinforcement

Rough handling, shock loading (prior to embedment)
and the dropping of reinforcement from a height should
be avoided. Reinforcement should be secured against
displacement outside the specified limits.
13 TRANSPORTING, PLACING,
COMPACTION AND CURING
12.3.1 Tolerances on Placing ofReinforcement

Unless otherwise specified by engineer-in-charge, the
reinforcement shall be placed within the following
13.1 Transporting and Handling
tolerances:
After mixing, concrete shall be transported to the

formwork as rapidly as possible by methods which will
prevent the segregation or loss of any of the ingredients
a) for effective depth 200 mm

or less
±JOmm
b) for effective depth more than
±15mm
Of ingress of foreign matter or water and maintaining
the required workability.
200mm
13.1.1 During hot or cold weather, concrete shall be

transported in deep containers. Other suitable methods
to reduce the loss of water by evaporation in hot
weather and heat loss in cold weathet may .~Iso be
adopted.
.
12.3.2 Tolerance for Cover

Unless specified otherwise, actual concrete cover
should not deviate from the required nominal cover
+10
by Omm.
13.2 Placing
Nominal cover as given in 26.4.1 should be specified

to all steel reinforcement including links. Spacers
between the links (or the bars where no links exist)
and the form work should be of the same nominal size
The concrete shall be deposited. as nearly as practicable

in its final position to avoid rehandling. The concrete.
shall be placed and compacted before initial setting of
concrete commences and should not be subsequently
disturbed. Methods of placing should be such as
to preclude segregation. Care should be taken to
avoid displacement of reinforcement or movement
of form work. As a general guidance, the maximum permissible free fall of concrete
may be taken
as 1.5 m.
as the nominal cover.

Spacers, chairs and other supports detailed on
drawings, together with such other supports as
may be necessary, should be used to maintain the
specified nominal cover to the steel reinforcement.
Spacers or chairs should be placed at a maximum
spacing of I m and closer spacing may sometimes be
necessary.
Spacers, cover blocks should be of concrete of same
strength or PVc.
13.3 Compaction
Concrete should be thoroughly compacted and fully
worked around the reinforcement, around embedded
fixtures and into corners of the formwork.
12.4 Welded Joints or Mechanical Connections

13.3.1 Concrete shall be compacted using mechanical
vibrators complying with IS 2505, IS 2506, IS 2514
and IS 4656. Over vibration and under vibration of
concrete are harmful and should be avoided. Vibration
of very wet mixes should also be avoided.
Welded joints or mechanical connections in

reinforcement may be used but in all cases ofimportant
connections, tests shall be made to prove that the joints
are of the lull strength of bars connected. Welding of
reinforcements shall be done in accordance with the
recommendations o£IS 2751 and IS 9417.
Whenever vibration has to be applied externally, the

design of formwork and the disposition of vibrators
12.5 Where reinforcement bars upto 12 mm for high·

strength deformed steel bars and up to 16 mm for mild
26
should receive special consideration to ensure efficient

compaction and to avoid surface blemishes.
IS 456: 2000
13.4 Constrnction Joints and Cold Joints
Joints are a common source of weakness and, therefore,

it is desirable to avoid them. If this is not possible,
their number shall be minimized. Concreting shall be
carried out continuously up to construction joints,

the position and arrangement of which shall be
indicated by the designer. Construction joints should
comply with IS 11817.
Construction joints shall be placed at accessible
locations to permit cleaning out of laitancc, cement

slurry and unsound concrete, in order to ~reate rough/
uneven surface. It is recommended to clean out laitance
and cement slurry by using wire brush on the surface
of joint immediately after initial setting of concrete
and to clean out the same immediately thereafter. The
prepared surface should be in a clean saturated surface
dry condition when fresh concrete is placed, against it.
of ordinary Porthind Cement and at least 10 days where

mineral admixtures or blended cements are used. The
period of curing shall not be less than 10 days for
concrete exposed to dry and hot weather conditions.
In the case of concrete where mineral admixtures or
blended cements are used, it is recommended that
above minimum periods may be extended to 14 days.
13.5.2 Membrane Curing

Approved curing compounds may be used in lieu of
moist curing with the permission of the engineer-incharge. Such compounds shall be
applied to all exposed
surfaces of the concrete as soon as possible after the
concrete has set. Impermeable membranes such as

polyethylene sheeting covering closely the concrete
surface may also be used to provide effective barrier
against evaporation.
13.5.3 For the conCrete containing Portland pozzolana
cement, Portland slag cement or mineral admixture,
period of curing may be increased.
In the case of construction joints at locations where

the previous pour has been cast against shuttering the
recommended method of obtaining a rough surface for
the previously poured concrete is to expose the
aggregate with a J;,igh pressure water jet or any other
appropriate means:' ,. .'
13.6 Snpervision
It is exceedingly diffICult and costly to alter concrete
once placed. Hence, constant and strict supervision of
all the itents of the construction is necessary during
the pr~g~ess of the work, including the proportioning
and ffilxmg of the concrete. Supervision is also of
extreme importance to check the reinforcell'lent and
its placing before being covered.
Fresh concrete shOuld be thoroughly vibrated near

construction j dints SO'that mortar from the "ew concrete
. flows between'liltge aggregates and develop proper
bond with old ~pncrete.
. Where high shear resistance is required at the
construction joints, shear keys may be provided.
13.6.1 Before any important operation; such as

concreting or stripping of the formwork is 'started
adequate notice shall be given to the constructio~
supervisor.
Sprayed curing membranes and release agents should

be thoroughly removed from joint surfaces.
13.5 Cnring
Curing is the process of preventing the loss of moisture
from the concrete .whilst maintaining a satisfactory
temperature regime. The prevention of moisture loss
from the concrete is particularly important ifthe watercement ratio is low, if the
cement has a high rate of
strength development, if the concrete contains
granulated blast furnace slag or pulverised fuel .sh.
The curing regime should also prevent the development
of high temperature gradients within the concrete.
14 CONCRETING UNDER SPECIAL'

CONDITIONS
14.1 Work in Extreme Weather Conditions
During hot or cold weather, the concreting should be
done as per the procedure set out in IS 7861
(Part I) or IS 7861 (Part 2).
14.2 Under-Water Concreting
The rate of strength development at early ages of

concrete made with super sulphated cement is
significantly reduced at lower temperatures.
Supersulphated cement concrete is seriously affected
by inadequate curing and the surface has to be kept
moist for at least seven days.
14.2.1 When it is necessary' to deposit concrete under

water, the methods, equipment, materials and
proportions of the mix to be used shall be submitted to
and approved by the engineer-in-charge before the
work is started.
14.2.2 Under-water concrete should have a slump
recommended in 7.1. The water-cement ratio shall not
exceed 0.6 and may need to be smaller, depending on
the grade of concrete or the type of chemical attack.
For aggregates of 40 mm maximum particle size, the
cement content shall be at least 350 kg/m' of concrete.
13.5.1 Moist Curing

Exposed surfaces of concrete shaH be kept
continuously in a damp or wet condition by ponding
or by covering with a layer of sacking, canvas, hessian
or similar materials and kept constantly wet for at least
seven days from the date of placing concrete in case
14.2.3 Coffer-dams or fonns shall be sufficiently tight

27
IS 456: 2000
surface, and thus avoid fonnation of laitance
layers. If the 'charge in the Iremie is lost while
depositing, the tremie shall be raised above ihe
concrete surface, and unless sealed by a check
valve, it shall be re-plugged at the top end, as at
the beginning, before refilling for depositing
to ensure still water if practicable, and in any case to

reduce the flow of water to less than 3 mlmin tbrough
the space into which concrete is to be deposited.
Coffer-dams or forms in still water shall be sufficiently
tight to prevent loss of mortar through the walls.
De-watering by pumping shall not be done while
concrete is being placed or until 24 h thereafter.
concrete.
b) Direct placement with pumps-As in the case
of the iremie method, the vertical end piece of
the pipe line is always inserted sufficiently deep
into the previously cast concrete and should not
move to the side during pumping.
141.2.4 Concrete cast under water should not faU freely

through the water. Otherwise it may be leached and
become segregated .. Concrete shall be deposited
continuously until it is brought to the required height.
While depositing, the top surface shall b. kept as nearly
level as possible and the formation of seams avoided.
The methods to be used for depositing concrete under
water shall be one of the following:
c) Drop bottom bucket -The top ofthe bucket shall

be covered with a canva, flap. The bottom doors
shall open freely downward and outward when
tripped. The bucket shall be filled completely and
lowered slowly to avoid backwash. The bottom
doors shall not be opened until the bucket rests
on the surface upon which the concrete is to be
deposited and when discharged, shall be
withdrawn slowly until well above the concrete.
a) Tremie-The concrete is placed through vertical

pipes the lower end of which is always inserted
sufficiently deep into the concrete which has
been placed previously but has not set. The
concrete emerging from the pipe pushes the
material that has already been placed to the side
and upwards and thus does not come into direct
contact with water.
d) Bags -- Bags of at least 0.028 m' capacity of

jute or other coarse cloth shall be filled about
two-thirds full of concrete, the spare end turned
under so that bag is square ended and securely
tied. They shall be placed carefully in header
and stretcher courses so that the whole mass is
interlocked. Bags used for this purpose shall be
free from deleterious materials.
When concrete is to be deposited under water

by means of tremie, the top section of the tremie
shall be a hopper large enough to hold one entire
batch of the mix or the entire contents the
transporting bucket, if any. The tremie pipe shall
be not less than 200 mm in diameter and shan
be large enough to allow a free flow of concrete
and strong enough to withstand the external
pressure of the water in which it is suspended,
even if a partial vacuum develops inside the pipe.
Preferably, flanged steel pipe of adequate
strength for the job should be used. A separate
lifting device shall be provided for each tremie
pipe with its hopper at the upper end. Unless
the lower end of the pipe is equipped with an
approved automatic check valve, the upper end
of the pipe shall be plugged with a wadding of
the gunny sacking or other approved material
before delivering the concrete to the tremie pipe
through the hopper, so that when the concrete is
forced down from the hopper to the pipe, it will
force the plug (and along with it any water in
the pipe) down the pipe and out of the bottom
end, thus establishing a continuous stream of
concrete. It will be necessary to raise slowly the
e) Grouting-A series of round cages made from

50 mm mesh of 6 mm steel and extending over
the full height to be concreted shall be prepared
and laid vertically over the area to be concreted
so that the distance between centres of the cages'
and also to the faces of the concrete shan not
exceed one metre. Stone aggregate of not less
than 50 mm nor more than 200 mm size shall be
deposited outside the steel cages over the full
area and height to be concreted with due care to
prevent displacement of the cages.
A stable 1:2 cement-sand grout with a watercement ratio of not less than 0.6 and
not more
than 0.8 shall be prepared in a mechanical mixer
and sent down under pressure (about 0.2 N/mm')
through 38 to 50 mm diameter pipes terminating
into steel cages, about 50mm above the bottom
of the concrete. As the grouting proceeds, the
pipe shall be raised gradually up to a height of
not more than 6 000 mm above its starting level
after which it may be withdrawn and placed into
the next cage for further grouting by the same
procedure.
tremie in order to cause a uniform flow of the

concrete, but the tremie shaIl not be emptied so
that water enters the pipe. At all times after the
placing of concrete is started and until all the
concrete is placed, the lower end of the tremie
pipe shall be below the top surt'ace of the plastic
concrete. This will cause the concrete to build
up from below instead of flowing out over the
After grouting the whole area for a height of

about 600 mm, the same operation shall be
repeated, if necessary, for the next layer of
28
IS 456 : :ZOOO
600 mm and so on.
The amount of grout to be sent down shall be
sufficient to fill all the voids which may be either
ascertained or assumed as 55 percent of the
volume to be concreted.
14.2.5 To minimize the formulation oflaitance, great

care shall be exercised not to disturb the concrete as
far as possible while it is being deposited.
15 SAMPLING AND STRENGTH OF
DESIGNED CONCRETE MIX
15.1 General
Samples from fresh concrete shan be taken as per
IS 1199 and cubes shall be made, cured and tested at
28 days in accordance with IS 516.
15.1.1 In order to get a relatively quicker idea of the

quality of concrete, optional tests on beams for
modulUS of rupture at 72 ± 2 h .or at 7 days, or
compressive strength tests at 7 days may be carried
out in addition to 28 days compressive strength test.
For this purpose the values should be arrived at based
on actual testing. In all cases, the 28 days compressive
strength specified in Table 2 shall alone be the criterion
.s
for testing at 28 days. Additional samples may be

required for various purposes such to determine the
strength of concrete at 7 days or at the time of striking
the formwork, or to determine the duration of curing,

or to cbeck the testing error. Additional samples may
also be required for testing samples cured by
accelerated methods as descrihedin IS 9103. The
specimen shall be tested as described in IS 516.
15.4 Test Results of Sample

The test results of the sample shall be the average of
the strength of three specimens. The individual
variation should not be more than ±15 percent of the
average. If more, the test results of the sample are invalid.
16 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
16.1 Compressive Strength

The concrete shall be deemed to comply with the
strength requirements when both the following
condition are met:

a) The mean strength determined from any group
of four consecutive test reslllts compiles with
the appropriate limits in col 2 of Table II.
b) Any individual test result complies with the
appropriate limits in col 3 of Table 11.
for acceptance or rejection of the concrete.
15.2 Frequen£y of Sampling

16.2 Flexural Strength
15.2.1 Sampling Prd",.,ilure
When both the following conditions are met, me

concrete complies with the specified flexural strength.
A random sampling procedure shall he adopted to

ensure that each concrete batch shall have a reasonable
chance of being tested that is, the sampling should he
spread over the entire period of concreting and cover
all mixing units.
a) The mean strength determined from any group
of four consecutive test results exceeds the

specified characteristic strength by at least 0.3
N/mm'.
15.2.2 Frequency
b) The strength determined from any test result is

not less than the specified characteristic strength
.
less 0.3N/mm'.
The minimum frequency of sampling of concrete of

each grade shan be in accordance with the following:
Quantity of Concrete in the
16.3 Quantity of Concrete Represented by

Strength 'Iest Resnlls
.
Number of Samples
Work, m'
1- 5
6 - 15
16 - 30
31 - 50
51 and above
The quantity of concrete represented by a group of

four consecutive test results shall include the batches
from which the first and last samples were taken
together with all intervening batches.
1
2
3
4
4 plus one
additional sample
for each additional
50 m' or part thereof
For the individual test result requirements given in

col 2 of Table 11 or in item (b) of 16.2, only the
particular batch from which the sample was taken shall
be at risk.
NOTE-At least one sample shaH be taken from each shift.

Where concrete is produced at continuous production unit, sllch
as ready~mixed concrete plant, frequency of ,sampling may be
agreed upon mutually by suppliers and purchasers,
Where the mean rate of sampling is not specified the
maximum quantity of concrete that four consecutive

test results represent shall be limited to 60 m'.
16.4 If the concrete is deemed not to comply persuant
to 16.3, the structural adequacy of the parts affected
shan be investigated (see 17) and any consequential
action as needed shan be taken.
.
15.3 Test Specimen

Three test specimens shall be made for each sample
29
IS 456: 2000
e) there is a system to verify that the quality is
satisfactory in individual parts of the structure,
especially the critical ones.
16.5 Concrete of each grade shall be assessed

separately.
16.6 Concrete is liable to be rejected if it is porous
or honey-combed. its placing has been interrupted
without providing a proper construction joint. the
reinforcement has been displaced beyond the
tolerances specified, or construction tolerances have
not been mel. However. the hardened concrete
may be accepted after carrying out suitable
remedial measures to the satisfaction of the engineer·
in-charge.
17.2 Immediately after stripping the formwork, all

concrete shall be carefully inspected and any defective
work or small defects either removed or made good
before concrete has thoroughly hardened.
17.3 Testing
17 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF

STRUCTURES
In case of doubt regarding the grade of concrete used,

either due to poor workmanship or based on results of
cube strength tests, compressive strength tests of
concrete on the basis of17.4 andlorload test (see 17.6)
may be carried out.
17.1 Inspection
17.4 Core Test
To ensure that the construction complies with the

design an inspection procedure should be set up
covering materials, records, workmanship and
17.4.1 The points from which cores are to be taken

and the number of cores required shall be at the
discretion of the engineet-in-charge and shall be
representative of the whole of concrete concerned.
In no case, however, shall fewer than three cores be
tested.
construction.
17.1.1 Tests should be made on reinforcement and

the constituent materials of concrete in accordance with
the relevant standards. Where applicable. use should
be made of suitable quality assurance schemes.
17.4.2 Cores shall be prepared and tested as described

in IS 516.
17.4.3 Concrete ill the member represented by a core
test shall be considered acceptable if the average
equivalent cube strength ofthecores is equal to at least
85 percent of the cube strength.ofthe gradeof concrete
specified for the corresponding age and no individual
core has a strength less than 75 percent.
17.1.2 Care should be taken to see that:

a) design and detail are capable of being executed
to a suitable standard. with due allowance for
ditnensional tolerances;
b) there are clear instructions on inspection
standards;
c) there aTe clear instructions -on permissible
deviations;
d) elements critical to workmanship, structural
performance, durability and appearance are
identified; and
17.5 In case. the core test results do not satisfy the

requirements of 17.4.3 or where such tests have not
been done, load test (17.6) may be resorted to~
17.6 Loa'! Tests for Flexural Member

17.6.1 Load tests should be carried out as soon as
Table 11 Characteristic Compressive Strength Compliance Requirement

(Clauses 16.1 and 16.3)
Specified
Grade
Mean of the Group of

4 Non~Overlapping
Consecutive
Test Results in N/Jnml
(2)
(I)
MIS
. Individual Test
Results in N/mml
(3)
~ fcl; + 0.825 Xestablished
standard deviation (rounded

off to nearest 0.5 N/mm2 )
or
f~k + 3 N/mm2 ,
whichever is greater
M 20
or
above
;;:; .f:"" + 0.825 x e..~tablished
standard deviation (rounded

off to nearest 0.5 N/mm2)
or
',"k + 4 N/mm2, whichever

is greater
NOTE-In the absence of established value of standard deviation, the values given in
Table 8 may be assumed, and attempt should be
made to obtain results of 30 samples as early as possible to establish the value of
standard deviation.
30
IS 456: 2000
possible after expiry of28 days from the time of placing
not apply.
of concrete.
17.7 Members Other Th~n Flexural Members
17.6.2 The structure should be subjected to a load equal

to full dead load of the structure plus 1.25 times the
imposed load for a period of24 h and then the imposed
load shall be removed.
Members other than flexural members shaul<\. be.

preferably investigated by analysis.
NOTE-Dead load includes self weight of the structural

members plus weight of finishes and walls or partitions, if any,
Non-destructive tests are used to obtain estimation of

the properties of concrete in the structure. The methods
adopted include ultrasonic pulse velocity [see IS 13311
(Part 1)] and rebound hammer [IS 13311 (Part 2)],
probe penetration, pullout and maturity. N ondestructive tests provide alternatives
to care tests for
estimating the strength of concrete in a structure, or
can supplement the data obtained from a limited
number of cores. These methods are based on
measuring a concrete property that bears some
relationship to strength. The accuracy of these methods,
in part, is determined by the degree of correlation
between strength and the physical quality measured
by the non-destructive tests.
as considered in the design.
17.6.3 The deflection due to imposed load only shall

be recorded. If within 24 h of removal of the imposed
load, the structure does not recover at least 75 percent
ofthe deflection under superimposed load, the tesi may
be repeated after a lapse of 72 h. If the recovery is less
than 80 percent, the structure shall be deemed to be
unacceptable.
17.6.3.1 If the maximum deflection in mm, shown

during 24 h under load is less than 401'1D, where I is
the effective span in m; and D, the overall depth of the
section in rom, it is not necessary for the recovery to
be measured and the recovery provisions of 17.6.3 shall
17.8 Non-destructive Te_t_
Any of these methods may be ndopted, in which case the

acceptance criteria shall be agreed upon prior to testing.
31
IS 456: 2000
SECTION 3 GENERAL DESiGN CONSIDERATION

be taken from Table 18 for the limit state of
collapse.
18 BASES FOR DESIGN
18.1 Aim of Design
18.3 Durability, Workmanship and Materials
The aim of design is the achievement of an acceptable

probability that structures being designed will perform
satisfactorily during their intended life. With an
appropriate degree of safety, they should sustain all
the loads and deformations of normal construction and
use and have adequate durability and adequate
It is assumed that the quality of concrete, steel and

other materials and of the workmanship, as verified
by inspections, is adequate for safety, serviceability
and durability.
resistance to ihe effects of misuse and fire.
IS.4 Design Process
18.2 Methods or Design
Design, including design for durability, construction

and use in service should be considered as a whole.
The realization of design objectives requires
compliance with clearly defined standards for
materials, production, workmanship and also
18.2.1 Structure and structural elements shall normally

be designed by Limit State Method. Account should
be taken of accepted theories, experiment and
experience and the need to design for durability.
Calculations alone do not produce safe, serviceable and
durable structures. Suitable materials, quality control,
adequate detailing and good supervision are equally
important.
maintenance and use of structure in service.

19 LOADS AND FORCES
19.1 General
In structural design, account shall be taken of the dead,
imposed and wind loads and forces such as those
caused by earthquake, and effects due to shrinkage,
creep, temperature, etc, where applicable.
18.2.2 Where the Limit State Method can not be

conveniently adopted, Working Stress Method (see
Annex B) may be used.
18.2.3 Design Based on Experimental Basis
19.2 Dead Loads
Designs based on experimental investigations on

models or full size structure or element may be
accepted if they satisfy the primary requirements
of 18.1 and subject to experimental details and the
analysis connected therewith being approved by the
Dead loads shall be calculated on the basis of unit

weights which shall be established taking into
consideration the materials specified for.construction.
19.2.1 Alternatively, the dead loads may be calculated
on the basis of unit weights of materials given in
IS 875 (Part I). Unless more accurate calculations afe .
warranted, the unit weights of plain concrete and
reinforced concrete made with sand and· gravel or
crushed natural stone aggr.egate may be taken as
24 kN/m' and 25 kN/m' respectively.
engjneer-in~charge.
18.2.3.1 Where the design is based on experimental

investigation on full size structure or element, load tests
shall be carried out to ensure the following:
a) The structure shall satisfy the requirements for
deflection (see 23.2) and cracking (see 35.3.2)
when subjected to a load for 24 h equal to the
characteristic load multiplied by 1.33 Yr, where
r;.shall be taken from Thble 18, for the Iimitstate
of serviceability. If within 24 h of the removal
of the load, the structure does not show a
recovery of at least 75 percent of the maximum
deflection shown during the 24 h under the load,
the test loading should be repeated after a lapse
of72 h. The recovery after the second test should
be at least 75 percent ofthe maximum deflection
shown during the second test.
19.3 Imposed Loads, Wind Loads and Snow Loads

Imposed loads, wind loads and snow loads shall be
assumed in accordance with IS 875 (Part 2), IS 875
(Part 3) and IS 875 (Part 4) respectively.
19A Earthquake Forces

The earthquake forces shall be calculated in
accordance with IS 1893.
19.5 Shrinkage, Creep and Temperature Effects
If the effects of shrinkage, creep and temperature are
liable to affect materially the safety and serviceability
of the structure, these shall be taken into account in
the calculations (see 6.2.4, 6.2.5 and 6.2.6) and
IS 875 (Part 5).
NOTE-If the maximum deflection in rom, shown during

24 h under load less than 40 [2ID where I is the effective span
in m; and D is the overall depth of the section in mm, it is not
necessary for the recovery to be measured.
is
b) The structure shall have adequate strength to

sustain for 24 h, a total load equal to the characteristic load multiplied by 1.33
Yr where 'Yr shall
19.5.1 In ordinary buildings, such as low rise dwellings

whose lateral dimension do not exceed 45 m,the
32
IS 456: 2000
effects due to temperature fluctuations and shrinkage
20.2 Sliding
and creep can be ignored in design calculations.
The structure shall have a factor against sliding of not

less than 1.4 under the most adverse p>mbination of the
applied characteristio forces. In this case only 0.9 times
the characteristic dead load shall be taken into account
19.6 Other Forces and Effects

In addition, account shaU be taken of the foUowing
forces and effects if they are liable to affect materiaUy
the safety and serviceability of the structure:
a) Foundation movement (see IS 1904),
b) Elastic axial shortening,
c) Soil and fluid pressures [see IS 875 (Part 5)],
d) Vibration,
e) Fatigue,
f) Impact [see IS 875 (Part 5)],
g) Erection loads [see IS ins (Part 2)], and

h) Stress concentration effect due to point load and
the like.
19.7 Comhination of Loads
Til.. combination of loads shaU be as given in IS 875
(Part 5).
19.8 Dead Load Counteracting Other Loads and
Forces
When dead load counteracts the effects due to other
loads and forces in structural member or joint, special
care shall be exercised by the designer to ensure
adequate safety for possible stress reversal.
19.9 Design Load
Design load is the load to be taken for us. in the
appropriate method of design; it is the characteristic
load in case of working stress method and characteristic
load with appropriate partial safety factors for limit
state design.
20 STABILITY OF THE STRUCTURE

20.1 Overtnrning
20.3 Probable Variation in Dead Load

To ensure stability at all times, account shall be taken
of probable variations in dead load during construction,
repair or other temporary measures, Wind and seismic
loading shall be treated as imposed loading.
20.4 Moment Connection
In designing the framework of a building provisions
shall be made by adequate moment connections or by
a system of bracings to effectively 'transmit all the
horizontal forces to the foundations.
20.5 Latel'al Sway
Under transient wind load the lateral sway at the top
should not exceed Hf500, where H is the total height
of the building. For seismic. loading, reference should
be made to IS 1893.
.
21 FIRE RESISTANCE
21.1 A structure or structural element required to have
fire resistance should be designed to possess an
appropriate degree of resistance to flame penetration;
heat transmission and failure. The ftre resistarice of a
struqtural element is expressed in terms of time in 'hours
in accordance with IS 1641. Fire resistance of concrete
elements depends upon details of member size,. cover
to steel reinforcement detailing and type of aggregate
(normal weight or light weight) used in concrete.
General requirements for ftre protection are given in
IS 1642.
21.2 Minimum requirements of concrete cover and
member dimensions for normal-weight aggregate
concrete members so as to have the required fire
resistance sball be in accordance with 26.4.3 and
Fig.l respectivl'ly.
The stability of a structure as a whole against

overturning shaU be ensured so that the restoring
moment shaU be not less than the sum of 1.2 times the
maximum overturning moment due to the characteristic
dead load and 1.4 times the maximum overturning
moment due to the characteristic imposed loads. In
cases where dead load provides the restoring moment,
only 0.9 times the characteristic dead load shaU be
cOllsidered. Restoring moment due to imposed loads
shall be ignored.
20.1.1 The anchorages or counterweights provided
for overhanging members (during construction and
service) should be such that static equilibrium
should remain, even when overturning moment is
doubled.
21.3 The reinforcement detailing should reflect the

changing palteruof the structural section and ensure
that both individual elements and. the Structure asa
whole contain adequate support, ties, bonds and
anchorages for the required ftre resistance.
.
21.3.1 Additional measures such as application of fire
resistant lInishes, provision of fire resistant false'
ceilings and sacrificial steel in tensile zone, should be
adopted in case the nominal cover required exceeds ' ..
40 mm for beams and 35 mm for slabs, to give
protection against spalling.
21.4 Specialist literature may be referred. to for
determining ftre resistance of the structures whichhave
not been covered in Fig. I or Table 16A.
33
IS 456: 2000
BEAMS
SOLID SLAB
RIB' WAFFEL SLAB
SLABS
:~. :
l~Jbl
:".:1>';:.
W~
.iI'. :'
...
.,..
',
, I- __: •
"
50·'. EXPOSED
--jbi-
ONE FAC.E EXPOSE
FUll Y EXPOSED
COLUMNS
Minimum _Wall Thickne,fs
Column Dimensi(Jn (b Of D)
Minimum
Rib
Minimum
Beam
Width
Thickness
Fully
lance
Width
(~fSlllbs
(~f Floors
Exposed
bw
mm
mm
125
125
125
125
150
175
mm
75
95
Fire
Resis
0.5
1.5
2
3
4
200
200
200
200
240
280
110
125
150
170
,
50%
Exposed
One
•
~
p<O.4%
0.4%"1,,,1%.
p>l%
mm
150
150
175
mUl
100
120
140
160
200
240
mm
100
100
100
100
150
Fuce
Rxposed
mm
150
200
250
300
400
450
mm
125
160
200
200
300
350
mm
100
120
140
160
200
240
18b
NOTES
1 These minimum dimensions relate specifically to the covers given in Table 16A.
2 p is the percentage of steel reinforcement.
FIG. I MINIMUM DIMENSIONS OP REINFORCED CONCRETE MEMBERS FOR FIRE REsISTANCE
22 ANALYSIS
22.2 Effective Span
22.1 General
Unless otherwise specified, the effective span of a

member shall be as follows:
All structures may lie analyzed by the linear

elastic theory to calculate internal ac.tions
produced by design loads. In lieu of rigorous elastic
analysis, a simplified analysis as given in 22.4 for
frames and as given in 22.5 for continuous beams may
be adopted.
a)
34
SimplySupported Beam or Slab-The effective

span of a member that is not built integrally with
its supports shall be .taken as clear span plus the
effective depth of slab or beam or centre to centre
of supports, whichever is less.
IS 456: 2000
22.4.1 Arrangement of Imposed Load
b) Continuous Beam or Slab - In the case of

continuous beam or slab, if the width of the
support is less than 1/12 of the clear span, the
effective span shalf be as in 22.2 (a). If the
supports are wider than 1/12 of the clear span
or 600 mm whichever is less, the effective span
shaU be taken as under:
a) Consideration may be limited to combinations

of:
1) Design dead load on a\1 spans with fu\1
design imposed load on two adjacent spans;
and
1) For end span with one end fixed and the

other continuous or for intennediate spans,
the effective span shaH be the clear span
between supports;
2) For end span with one end free and the other .
continuous, the effective span shaH be equal
to the clear span plus half the effective depth
of the beam or slab or the clear span plus
half the width of the discontinuous support,
whichever is less;
3) In the case of spans with ro\1er or rocket
bearings, the effective span sha\1 always be
the distance between the centres of bearings.
c) Cantilever-The effective length of a cantilever
shall be taken as its length to the face of the
support plus half the effective depth except
where it forms the end of a continuous beam
where the length to the centre of support shall
betaken.
d) Frames - In the analysis of a continuous frame,
centre to centre distance shall be used.
22.3 Stiffness
22.3.1 Relative Stiffness
The relative stiffness of the members may be based on
the moment of inertia of the section determined on
the basis of anyone of the fo\1owing definitions:
a) Gross section - The cross-section ·of the
member ignoring reinforcement;
2) Design dead load on a\1 spans with fu\1

design imposed load on alternate spans.
b) When design imposed load does not exceed
three-fourths of the design dead load, the load
arrangement may be design dead load and design
imposed load on a\1 the spans.
NOTE - For beams and slabs continuous over support
22.4.1(a) may be assumed.
22.4.2 Substitute Frame

For determining the moments and shears at any floor
or roof level due to gravity loads, the beams at iliat
level together with columns above and below with their
far ends fixed may be considered to constit~te the
frame.
22.4.2.1 Where side sway consideration becomes
critical due to unsymmetry in geometry or loading,
rigorous analy sis may be required,
22.4.3 For lateral loads, simplified methods may be
used to obtain the moments and shears for struPtures
that are symmetrical. For unsymnietrical or very taH
structures, mo/e rigorous methods should be used ..
22.S Moment and Shear Coefficients.for·
Continuous Beams
22.5.1 Unless more exact estimates are. made, for
beams of uniform cross-section which support.
snbstantia\1y uniformly distributed loadsD"er three or
more spans which do not differ by more than 15 percent
of the longes~the bending moments and shear forces
used in design may be obtained using the coefficients
given in Table 12 and Table 13 respectively.
b) Transformed section .,- The concrete cross- For moments at suppotts where two
unequal spans
section plus the area of· reinforcement meet orin case where the spans are not
equally loaded,
1______itr~a:ln:;sfi1o~rmii.·red-o-n-th-e-b-as-i-
s_o_f_m_o_d_u_lar_r_att_'o~(s_e_e_-::th,e average of the two values for the
negative moment
B-l.3); or
at thesupport may be taken for design.
c) C~acked section - The area of concrete in Where coefficiilnts given hi Table 12
are used for
compression plus the area of reinforcement calculation of bending moments,
redistribution referred
to in 22.7 shall not.be permitted.
transformed on the basis of modular ratio.
The assumptions made shall be consistent for all the. . 22.5.2 Beams and Slabs Over
Froe End Supports
members of the structure throughout any analysis.
Where a member is built into a masonry wall which
22.3.2 For deflection calculations, appropriate values develops only partial
restraint, the member shall be
of moment of inertia is specified in Annex C should designed to resist a negative
moment at the face of the
support of W/124 where W is the total design load
be used.
and I is
effective span, or such other restraining
22.4 Structural Frames
moment as may be shown to be applicable. For such a
The simplifying assmnptions as given in 22.4.1 condition shear coefficient given in
Table 13 at the
end support may be increased by 0.05.
to 22.4.3 may be used in the analysis of frames.
the
35
IS 456.: 2000
Table 12 Bending Moment Coefficienls
(Clause 22.5.1)
Type of Load
Span Moments
r
Support Moments
Near Middle
of End Span
At Middle
of Interior
Span
At Support
Next-to the
End Support
Supports
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(1)
AtOlber
Interior
Dead load and imposed

load (fixed)
+-
1
12
+16
IO
12
Imposed load (not
1
+IO
+-
1
12
fixed)
NOTE - For obtaining th~ bending moment, tbe Coefficient sha)) be multiplied by the
total design load and ef!ective span.
Table 13 Shear for Coefficienls

(Clauses 22.5.1 and 22.5.2)
Type.fLood
At End
Support
At Support Next to the

End S!Ipport
Outer Side
AI All Other
Interior Supports
Inner Side
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Dead lond and imposed

lond (flxed)
0.4
0.6
0.55
0.5
Imposed, load (~ot

fixed)
0.45
0.6
0.6
0.6
(I)
NOTE - For o~tnining the shear force, th~ coefficient shall be multiplied by the
tota~ design load.
22.6 Critical Section. for Moment and Shear
23 BEAMS
22.6.1 For'monolithic construclion, the moments

computed at the face ofthe'supports shall be used in
the designofthe members at those sections. For nonmonolithic 'construction lbe
design of lbe member shall
be done keeping in view 22.2.
23.0 Effedive Depth
22.6.2 Critical Seetio/! for Shear .
The shears computed at Ihe face of the support shall

be used in the design of the member at that section
except as in 22.6.2.1.
Effective deplb of a beam is the distance between the

. centroid of the area of tension reinforcement and the
maximum compression fibre, excluding the thickness
of finishing material not placed monolithically with
the member and the thickness of any concrete provided.
to allow for wear. Thiswill not apply 10 deep beams.
23.1 T.Beams and L·Beams

23.1.1 General
22.6.2.1 When the reaction in the direction of the

applied shear introduces compression into the end
region of the member, sections located at a distance
less than d from the face of the support may be
designed for the same shear as that computed at
distance d (see Fig. 2).
A slab which is assumed to act as a compression

flange of a T-beam or L-beam shall satisfy the
following:
a) The slab shall be cast integrally with the web,
or the web and the slab shaUbe effectively
bonded togelber in any other manner; and
NOTE-The above clauses are applicable for bellms generally

carrying unifonnly distributed load or where the principnl load
is located farther than 2d from the face of fhe support.
b) If the main reinforcement of the slab is"parallel

to the beam, transverse reinforCement shall be
provided as in Fig. 3; such reinforcement shall
not be less than 60 percent of the main
reinforcement at mid span of the slab.
22.7 Redistribution of Momenls
Redistribution of moments may be done in accordance

with 37.1.1 for limit state method and in accordance
with B-l.2 for working stress method. However, where
simplified analysis using coefficients is adopted,
redistribution of moments shall not be done.
23.1.2 Effective Width of Flange
In the absence of more accurate detennination, the

effective width of flange may be taken as the following
36
IS 456: 2000
,
,
~I
'\ ,
~d
(0)
(b)
FIG. 2 TYPICAL SUPPORT CONDITIONS FOR LOCATING 'FACTORED SHEAR FORCE
but in no case greater than the breadth of the web plus

half the sum of theelear distances to the adjacent beams
structure or finishes or partitions. The deflection shall

generally be limited to the following:
on either side.
a) ForT-beams,b,
a) The final deflection due to all loads including

the effects of temperature, creep and shrinkage
and measured from the as-cast level of the
supports of floors, roofs and all other horizontal
members, should not normally exceed 'pan/2S0.
10
=6' +b. + 6V,
b) For L-beams,
. b, . = .!!L
12 + b• + 3 V f·
b) The deflection including the effecfs of

temperature, creep and sbritlkage occurring after
erection of partitions and the application of
finishes should not normally exceed span/350
or 20 mm whichever is less;
c) For isolated beams, the effective flange width

shall be obtained as below butin no case greater
than the actual width:
T - beam,b,
=(1)10 +4 +.
b.
...!l..
23.2.1 The vertical deflection limits may generally he

assumed to be satisfied provided that the span to depth
ratios are not greater than the values obtaiti.id as below:
a) Basic values of span to effective depth ratios
for spans up to 10 m:
0.5 10 b
L-beam,br-(I)
+ w
--"- +4
b
Cantilever
Simply supported
Continuous
where
b, = effective width ofthnge,
20
26
b) For spans above 10 m, the values in (a) may be

multiplied by lO/span in metres, except for
I" = distance between points of zero moments
in the beam,
cantilever in which case deflection calculations
b. = breadth of the web,
should be made.
D = thickness of flange, . and
c) Depending on the area and the stress of

steel for tension reinforcement, the values in (a)
or (b) shall be modified by multiplying with the
modification factor obtained as per Fig. 4.
b = actual width of the flange.

NOTE - For continuous beams and frames, '10' may be
assumed as 0.'1 times the effective span.
d) Depending on the' area of compression

reinforcement, the value of span to depth ratio
be further modified by multiplying with the
modification factor obtained as per Fig. 5.
23.2 Control of Defteelion

The deflection of a structure or part thereof shall not
adversely affect the appearance or efficiency of the
37
IS 456: 2000
__-:".J
I
I
BEAM
I
I
I
__.__ JI
;r
---
..,
'X
I/ - - - -
BEAM
SECTION XX
FIG. 3 'TRANSVERsE RruNFORCEMENT IN FLANGE OF T-BEAM WHEN MAIN RruNFORCEMENT OF
SLAB IS PARALLEL TO THE BEAM
e) For flanged beams, the values of (a) or (b) be

modified as per Fig. 6 and the reinforcement
percentage for use in Fill' 4 and 5 should be based
2·0
!\
on area of section equal to b, d.
\\ \ \
I\. ~
\
\ \ '\
i"-"'
"
........
'-......
f\ ~ I'---. r--- t--- ~ZO
it 1·2
145
0:
oIU
~ I'--
"o
u:
'" --- --
i'--- r---
0·8
--
r-- r-I--
f ••
-.,.
fs:.: 190
Is· 240
Is' 290
15
o
::;
o· 4
I
Not.: Is IS STEEL STRESS OF SERVICE
I LOADS IN N/mm 2
0'4
0'8
. .
NOTE--Whell deflections are re'quired to be calcul~ted; the

method given in Annex C may be used.
1·2
1'6
2·0
2-4
PERCENTAGE TENSION REINFORCEMENT
f, = 0.58 f, Areaofcross -section of steel required

~
Y Arenot cross - section of steel provided
FIG. 4 MODIFICATION FACTOR FOR TENSION REINFORCEMENT
38
2'8
~O
IS 456: 2000
./
:,/
I--""
-'" V
V V
--
..
0·50
'.00
1·50
2·00
2-50
PERCENTAGE COMPRESSION REINFORCEMENT
FIG. 5 MODIFICATION FACTOR FOR COMPRESSION REINFORCEMENT
"/
0-95
/
/
/
0'2 0·4 0-6 0'8 1-0

RATIO OF WEB WIDTH
TO FLANGE WIDTH
FIG. 6 REDUCTION FACTORS FOR RA:nos OF SPAN TO EFFECTIVE DEPTIJ FOR FLANGED BEAMS
NOTES
23.3 Slenderness Limits for Beams to Ensnre

Lateral Stability
1 For slabs spanning in two directions, the shorter of the two

spans should be used for calculating the span to effective
depth ratios.
2 For two-way slabs of shorter spans (up to 3.5
with mild
steel reinforcement, the span to overall depth ratios given
below may generally be assumed to satisfy vertical
deflection limits for loading class up to 3 kN/m1 ,
Simply supported slabs
·35
A simply supported or continuous beam shall be so

proportioned that the clear distance between the lateral
m)
.
250b z
restraints. does not exceed 60 b or . d - whichever
is less, where d is the effective depth of the beam and
h the breadth of the compression face midway between
the lateral restraints.
<:;ontinuous slabs
For a cantilever, the clear distance from the free end

of the cantilever to the lateral. restraint shall not
100h
. 40
For high strength defomled bars of grade Fe 415, the values

given aboye should be multiplied by 0.8.
24.2 Slabs Continuous Over Supports
Slabs spanning in one direction and continuous over

supports shall be designed according to the provisions
applicable to continuous beams.
exceed 25 b or -d-· whichever is less.
24 SOLID SLABS
24.3 Slabs Monolithic with Supports
24.1 General
Bending moments in slabs (except flat slabs) constmcted

monolithically with the supports shall be calculated by
taking such slabs either as continuous over supports and
The provisions of 23.2 for beams apply to slabs

also.
39
IS 456: 2000
capable of free rotation, or as members of a continuous
framework with the supports, taking into account the
stiffness of such supports. If stich supports are formed
due to beams whichjustilJ fixity at the support of slabs,
then the effects on the supporting beam, such as, the
bending of the web in the transverse direction of the
beam and the torsion in the longitudinal direction of the
beam, wherever applicable, shall also be considered in
the design of the beam.
24.3.1 For the purpose of calculation of moments in
slabs in a monolithic structure, it will generally be
sufficiently accurate to assume that members connected "
to /he ends of such slabs are fixed in position and
direction at the ends remote from their connections
with the slabs.
24.3.2 Slabs Carrying Concentrated Load
c) For two or more loads not in a line in the

direction of the span. if the effective width of
slab for one load does not overlap the effective
width of slab for another load, both calculated
as in (a) above, then the slab for each load can
be designed separately. If the effective width
of slab for one load overlaps the effective width
of slab for an adjacent load. the overlapping
portion of the slab shall be designed for the
combined effect of the two loads.
Thble 14 Values of k for Simply Supported aud
Continuous Slabs
(ClaU$e 24.3.2.1)
Ill..
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0,7
0.8
0.9
24.3.2.1 If a solid slab supported on two opposite edges,

carries concentrated loads the maximum bending
moment ·oaused by the concentrated loads shall be
assumed to be resisted by an effective width of slab
(measured parallel to the supporting edges) as follows:
a) For a single concentrated load, the effective
width shall be calculated in accordance with the
following equation provided that it shali not
exceed the actual width of the slab:
1.0 and move

kforSlmply
.k for Continuous
Supported Slabs
Slabs
0.4
0.8
1.16
1.48
1.72
1.96
2.12
2.24
2.36
2.48
0.4
0.8
1.16
1.44
1.68
1.84
1.96
2.08
2.16
2.24
d) For cantilever solid slabs. the effective width

shall be calculated in accordance with the
following equation:
b,,=1.2a,+a
where
h" = effective width.
a, = distance of the concentrated load from the
face of the cantilever support. and
a = width of contact area of the concentrated
load measured parallel to the supporting
'
edge.
where
b" =
effective width of slab,
= constant having the values given in Table

14 depending upon the ratio of the width
of the slab (l~ to the effective span I" '
=
I"
= effective span. and
distance of the centroid of the

concentrated load from nearer support.
Provided that the effective width of the' cantilever

slab shall not exceed one-third the length of the
cantilever slab measured parallel to the fixed edge.
width of the contact area of the

concentrated load from nearer support
measured parallel to the supported edge.
And provided further that when the concentrated

load is placed near the extreme ends of the length
of cantilever slab in the direction parallel to the
fixed edge. the effective width shall not exceed
the above value. nor shall it exceed half the
above value plus the distance of the concentrated
load from the extreme end meastired in the
direction parallel to the fixed edge.
And provided further that in case of a 10ad near

the unsupported edge of a slab. the effective
width shall not exceed the above value nor half
the above value plus the distance of the load from
the unsupported edge.
24.3.2.2 For slabs other than solid slabs. the effective

width shall depend on the ratio of the transverse and
longitudinal flexural rigidities of the slab. Where this
ratio is one. that is. where the transverse and
longitudinal flexural rigidities are approximately
equal. the value of effective width as found for solid
slabs may be used. But as the ratio decreases.
proportionately smaller value shall be taken.
b) For two or more concentrated loads placed in a

line in the direction of the span, the bending
moment per metre width of slab shall be
calculated separately for each load according to
its appropriate effective width of slab calculated
as in (a) above and added together for design
calculations.
40
IS 456 :2000
signs), thetotal should be equal to that from (a).
24.3.2.3 Any other recognized method of analysis for

cases of slabs covered by 24.3.2.1 and 24.3.2.2 and
for all other cases of slabs may be used with the
approval of the engineer· in-charge.
If the resulting support moments are significantly greater than the value from
Table 26, the
tension steel over the supports will need to be
extended further. The procedure should be as
follows:
24.3.2.4 The critical section for checking shear shall

be as given in 34.2.4.1.
I)
Tlli<e the span moment as parabolic between

supports: its maximum value is as found
from (d).
2)
Determine the points of contraflexure of the

new support moments [from (c)] with the
span moment [fr?m (I)].
3)
Extendhalfthe support tension steel at each

,end to at least an effective depth or 12 bar
diameters beyond the 'nearest. point of
contraflexure.
4)
Extend the full area of the support tension

steel at each end to half the distance from
(3).
24.4 Slabs Spanning in 1\vo Directions at Right

Angles
The slabs spanning in two directions at right angles
and carrying uniformly distributed load may be
designed by any acceptable theory or by using
coefficients given in Annex D. For deltmnining
bending moments in slabs spanning in two,directions
at right angles and carrying concentrated load, any
accepted method approved by the engineer-in,charge
may be adopted.
NOTE-The most commonly used elastic methods are based
on Pigeaud's or Wester-guard's theory and the most coinmonly
used limit state of collapse method is balled on Johansen's yield-
line theory..
24.5 Loads on Supporting Beams
24.4.1 Restrained Slab with Unequal Conditions at

Adjacent Panels
In some cases the support moments calculated from
Table 26 for adjacent panels may differ significantly.
The following procedure may be adopted to, adjust
them:
a) Calculate the sum of moments at midspan and
supports (neglecting signs).
b) Treat the values from Table 26 as fixed end
moments.
c) According to the relative stiffness of adjacent
spans, distribute the fixed end moments across
the supports, giving new support moments.
d) Adjust midspan moment such tha~ When added
to the support moments from (c) (neglecting
The loads on beams supporting solid slabs spanning

in two directions at right angles and supporting
uniformly distributed loads, may
assumed to be in
accordance withFig. 7.
'
be
25 COMPRESSION MEMBERS
25.1 Definitions
25.1.1 Column or strut iS,a compression member, the
effective length of which exceeds three times the least
lateral dimension.
.
25.1.2 Short and Slender Compression Members

A compression member may be considered as sh~rt
,
'
when both the slenderness ratios lex and ley are less
than 12:
LOAD IN THIS SHADED'

AREA TO BE CARRIED
BV BEAM 'B'
IN THIS SHADED AREA
TO BE CARRIED BY BEAM 'Il
FIG. 7 LOAD CARRIED BY SUPPORTING BEAMS
41
B
b
IS 456' : 2000
where
lex ==
where
effective length in respect of the major
axis,
depth in respect of the major axis,
effective length in respect of tlte minor
axis, and
b
b =
D
25.4 Minimum Eccentricity
= width of the member.
All columns shall be designed for mInImUm

eccentricity, equal to tlie unsupported lengtlt of colum.v
500 plus lateral dimensions/30, subject to a minimum
of 20 mm. Where bi-axial bending is considered, it is
sufficient to ensure that eccentricity exceeds the
It shall otherwise, be considered as a slender

compression member.
25.1.3 Unsupported Length

The unsupported length, I, of a compression member
shall be taken as the clear distance between end
restraints except that:
minimum about one axis at a time.

26 REQUIREMENTS,GOVERNING
REINFORCEMENT AND DETAILING
a) inflat slab constroction, it shall be clear distance

between the floor and the lower extremity of
the capital, the drop panel or slab whichever is
the leas!.
26.1 General
Reinforcing steel of same type and grade shall be used
as main reinforcement in a structural member.
However, simultaneous use of two different types or
grades of steel for main and secondary reinforcement.
respectively is permissible.
b) in beam and slab construction, it shall be the

clear distance between the floor and the
underside of the shallQwer beam framing into
the columns in each direction at the next higher
floorlevel.
26.1,1 Bars may be arranged singly, or in pairs in
contact, or in groups of three or four bars bundled in
contact. Bundled bars shall be enclosed within stirrups
or ties. Bundled bars shaU be tied togetber to ensure
the bars remaining together. Bars larger'than::l2 mm
diameter shall not be bundled;, except in columns.
c) in columns restrained laterally by strots, it shall

be the clear 'distance between consecutive
strots in each vertical plane, provided that to be
an adequate support,. two such struts' shall
meet the columns at approximately tile same
"level and the angle between vertical planes
: through the struts shall not vary more than 30'
from a 'right angle. Such struts shail be of
adequate dimensions and shall have sufficient
anchorage to restrain the member against lateral
deflection.
'
26.1.2 The recommendations for detailing for

earthquake-resistant constroction given: iuTS 13920
should betaken into consideration, where, applicable
(see also IS 4326).
26,2 Development of Stress in Reinforcement
The calculated tension or compression in 'any bar at
any section shall be developed on each side of the
section by an appropriate development length or end
anchorage or by a combination thereof.
d) in columns restrained lateraUy by struts or

beams, with brackets used at the junction, it shall
be the clear distance between the floor and the
lower edge of the bracket, provided that the
bracket width equals that of the beara strut and
is at least half that of the column,
26.2.1 Development Length of Bars

., The development length Ld is given by
_ ",a,
La - - -
In the absence of more exact analysis, the effective

length I,r of columns may be obtained as described in
Annex E.
41"bd
where
l' = nominal diaraeter of the bar,

as = 'stress in bar at the section considered at design
25.3 Slenderness Limits for Columns

25.3,1 The unsupported length between end restraints
shall not exceed 60 times the least lateral dimension
ofacolumn.
load, and
"t., = design bond stress given in 26,2.1,1.
NOTES
25.3,2 If, in any given plane, one end of a column is

unrestrained, its unsupported length, I, shall not exceed
100h
= depth of the cross-section measuredin the

plane under consideration.
25.2 Effective Length of Compression Members
width of that cross-section, and
1 The development length includes anchorage values of hooks

'in tension reinforcement.
2 For bars of sections oth~r than circular, the development
length should be sufficient to develop the stress in the bat'
---'
D
by bonq.
42
IS 456: 2000
26.2.1.1 Design bond stress in limit state method for plain bars in tension sball
be as below:
Grade of concrete
M20
M25
M30
M35
Design boruJ stress,

f"", N/mm2
1.2
1.4
1.5
1.7
1.9
2) In the compression zone, from the mid depth

of the beam.
For deformed bars conforming to IS 1786 these values

shall be increased by·60 percent.
For bars in compression, the values of bond stress for
bars in tension shall be increased by 25 percent.
b) Stirrups-Notwithstanding any of the

provisions of this standard, in case of secondary
reinforcement, such as stirfllps and transverse
ties, complete development lengths and
anchorage shall be deemed to have been
provided when the bar is bent through an angle
of at least 90" round a bar of at least its own
diameter and is continuedbeYOlid the.end olthe
curve for a length of at least eight diameters, or
when the bar is bent through an angle of 135"
and is continued beyond the end of the curve
for a length of at least six bar diameters or When
the bar is bent through an angle of IS()<> and i.
continued beyond the end 'of the curve for a
length of at least four bar diameters.
The values of bond stress in working .stress design,

. are given in B-2.1.
·26.2.1.2 Bars bundled in contact

The development length of each bar of bundled bars
shall be that for the individual bar, increased by 10
percent for two bars in contact, 20 percent for three
bars .in contact and 33 percent for four bars in contact.
26.2.2 Anchoring ReinforCing Bars

26.2.2.1 Anchoring bars in tension.
a) Deformed bars may be used without end
·anchorages provided development length
requirement is satisfied. Hooks should normally
be provided for plain bars in tension.
.M 40 and above
26.2.2.5 Bearing stress.s at bends
b) Bends and hooks - Bends and hooks sball The bearing stress in concrete for bends
and hooks
described in IS 2502 need not be checked. The bearing
conform to IS 2502
stress inside a bend in any other bend shall be calculated
I ) Bends-The anchorage value of bend shall . as given below:
be taken as 4 times the diameter of the bar
for each 45" bend subject to a maximum of
Bearing stress =
16 times the diameter of the bar.
2) Hooks-The anchorage value of a standard
lI-type hook shaU·be equal to 16 times the
diameter of the bar.
26.2.2.2 Anchoring bars in compression

The anchorage length of straight bar in compression
shall be equal to the development length of bm·s in
compression as specified in 26.2.1. The projected
length of hooks, bends and straight lengths beyond
bends if provided for a bar in compression, shall only
be considered for development length.
26.2.2.3 Mechanical devices for ,!nchorage

Any mechanical or other device capable of developing
the strength of the bar without dmoage to concrete may
be used as anchorage with the approval of the engineerin-charge.
26.2.2.4 Anchoring shear reinforcement

a) bIClinedbars - The development length shall
where
Fhl '" tensile force due to design loads ina bar

or group of bars,
r = internal radius of the bend, and
,p . = sire of the bar or, in bundle, the size of bar
of equivalent area.
For limit siate method of design, this stress shall not,
exceed 1.5 fel<
1+2,p/a
where f", is the characteristic cube

.
strength of concrete and a, for a particular bar or group

of bars in contact shall betaken as the centre to centre
distance between bars or groups of bars perpendicular
to the plane of the bend; for a bar or group of
bars adjacent to the· face of the member a shall be
taken as the cover plus size of bar ( <1». For working
'streJls method of design, the bearing stress shall
not exceed
be as for bars in tension; .this length shall be

measured as under:
lek
1+2,p/a
26.2.2.6 If a change in direction. of tension or

1) In tension zone, from the end ofthe sloping , . compression reinforcement
induces a resultant force
acting outward tending .10 split the concrete, suel) force
or inclined portion of the bar, and
43
IS 456: 2000
should be taken up by additional links or stirrups. Bent
tension bar at a re-entrant angle should be avoided.
26.2.3 Curtailment of Tension Reinforcement in
Flexural Members
where
M, = moment' of iesistance of the section
26.2.3.1 For curtailment, reinforcement shan extend

beyond the point at which it is no longer required to
resist flexure for a distance equal to the effective depth
of the' member or 12 times the bar diameter, whichever
is greater except at simple support or endorcantilever.
In addition 26.2.3.2 to 26.2.3.5 shan also be satisfied.
NOTE-A point at which reinforcement is no longer required
to resist flexure is where-tlie resistruice moment of the section,
considering only the continuing bars, ,is equal to the design
moment.
assuming all reinforcement at the section

to be stressed to 1,,;
1"
0.87 fy in the case of limit state design

and the permissible stress 0" in the case
of working stress design;
V =
shear force at the section due to design

loads;
Lo =
sum of the anchorage beyond the centre

of the support and the equivalent
anchorage value of any hook or
mechanical anchorage at simple support;
and at a point ofinfiection. Lo is limited
to the effective depth of the members or
121/>, whichever is greater; and
26.2.3.2 Flexural reinfotcement shan not be terminated

in a tension· zone unless anyone of the fonowing
conditions is satisfied:
a) The shear at the cut-off point does not exceed
two-thirds that permitted, including the shear
strength of web reinforcement provided.
b) Stirrup area in excess of that required far shear
and torsion is provided along each terminated
· bar over a distance from the cut-off point equal
ta'three-faurths the effective depth of the
member. The excess stirrup area shall be not
less than 0.4 bslf" where b is the breadth of
beam, s is the spacing andf, is the characteristic
strength of reinforcement in N/mm'. The
resulting spacing shall not exceed diS J3" where
Ph is the ratio of the area of bars cut-off to the
total area of bars at the section, and d is the
effective depth.
c) For 36 mm and smaller bars, the continuing bars
provide double the area required for flexure at
the cut-off point and the shear does not exceed
three-fourths that permitted.
= diameter of bar.
The value of M, IV ill the above expression may be .

increased by 30 percent when the ends of the •
reinforcement are confined by a compressive reaction.
26.2.3.4 Negative moment reinforcement
At least one-third of the totalreinforeement provided

for negative moment at the support shall extend beyond
the point of inflection for a distance not I<;ss tban the
effective depth ofthe member of 12 Jj> or one-sixteenth
of the clear span whichever is greater.
26.2.3.5 Curtailment of bundled bars
Bars in a bundle shall terminate at different points

spaced apart by not less than 40 times the bar diameter
except for bundles stopping at a support.
26.2A Special Members
Adequate end anchorage shall'be provided for tension

reinforcement" in flexural members where reinfor.cement stress is not directly
proportional to moment,
such as sloped, stepped. or tapered footings; brackets;
deep beams; and members in which the tension
reinforcement is not parallel to the compression face.
26.2.3;3 Positive moment reinforcement
a) At least one-third the positive moment

reinforcement in simple members and onem
· fourth the positive moment reinforcement in
continuous members shall extend along the same
face of the member into the support, to a length
eqllal to L/3.
26.2.5 Reinforcement Splicing
Where splices are provided in the reinforcing bars, they

shall as far as possible be away from the sections of
maximum stress and be staggered. It is recommended
that splices in flexural members should not be at
sections where the bending moment is more than 50
pereent of the momentofrosistance; and not more than
half the bars shall be spliced at a section.
b) When a flexural member is part of the primary

later"l load resisting system; the positive
· reinforcement required to be extended into the
support as described in (a) shall be anchored to
develop its design stress in tension at the face
of the support.
c) At simple supports and at points of inflection,
positive moment tension reinforcement shalt be
limited to a diameter such that L, computed for
J, by 26.2.1 does not exceed
Where more than one-half of the bars are spliced at a

section or where splices are made at points of
maximum stress, special precautions shall be taken,
44
IS 456: 2000
at a time; such individual splices within a bundle
shall be staggered.
such as increasing the length of lap and/or using spirals

or closely-spaced stirrups around the length of the
splice.
26.2.5.2 Strength of we Ids
26.2.5.1 Lap splices
The following values may be used where the strenglh

of the weld has been proved by tests to be at least as
great as that of the parent bar.
a) Lap splices shall not be used for bars larger than

36 mm; for larger diameters, bars may be
welded (see 12.4); in cases where welding is
not practicable, lapping of bars larger than
36 mm may be permitted, in which case
additiana\ spirals should be provided around the
lapped bars.
b) Lap splices shall be considered as staggered if
the centre to centre distance of the splices is
not less than 1.3 times the lap length calculated
as described in (c).
c) Lap length including anchorage value of hooks
for bat·s in flexural tension shall be L, (see
26.2.1) or 30tjJ whichever is greater
and for direct tension shall be 2L, or 30'1>
whichever is greater. The straight length of the
lap shall not be less than 15'1> or 200 mm. The
following provisions shall also apply:
Where lap occurs for a tension bar located at:
I) top of a section as cast and the minimum cover

is less than twice the diameter of the lapped
bar, the lap length shall be increased by a factor
of 1.4.
2) corner of a section and the minimum cover to
either face is less than twice the diameter of
"the lapped bar or where the clear distance
between adjacent laps is less than 75 mm or·6
times the diameter oflapped bar, whichever is
greater, the Jap length should be increased hy a
factorof 1.4. ,
.
Where both condition (1) and (2) apply,the lap
length should be increased by a factor of 2.0.
a)
Splices in compression - Fol' welded splices

and mechanical connection, 100 percent ofthe
design strength of joined bars.
b) Splices in tension
I) 80 percent of the design strength of welded
bars (l00 percellt if welding is strictly
supervised and if at any cross-section of the
member not more than 20 percent of the
tensile reinforcement is welded).
2) 100 percent of design strength of mechanical connection.
26.2.5.3 End-bearing splices

End-bearing splices shall be used only for bars in
compression. The ends of the bars shall be square cut
and concentric bearing ensured by suitable devices.
26.3 Spacing of Reinforcement

26.3.1 For the purpose of this clause, the diameter of
a round bar shall be its nominal diameter. and in the
case of bars which are not round or in the case of
deformed bars or crimped bars, the diameter shall be
ta!<en as the diameter of a circle giving an equivalent
effective area. Where spacing limitations and
minimum concrete cover (see 26.4) are based on bar
diameter, a group of bars bundled in conta~t shall be
treated as a single bar of diameter derived from the
total equivalent area.
26.3.2 Minimum Distance Between Individual Bars

The following shall apply for spacing of bars:
NOTE-Splices in tension members shall h.e enclosed in

spirals made of bars not less than 6 mm diameter with pitch
not more than 100 mm.
a) The horizontal distance between two parallel

main reinforcing bars shall usually be not less
than the greatest of the following:
d) The lap length in compression shall be equal to

the development length in compression,
calculated as described in 26.2.1, but not less
than 24 tjJ.
e) When bars of two different diameters are to be
spliced, the lap length shall be calculated on
the basis of diameter of the smaller bar.
I) The diameter of the bar if the diameters are

equal,
2) The diameter of the larger bar if the,
diameters are unequal, and
3) 5 mm more than the nominal maximum size
of coarse aggregate.
t)
NOTE-This does not preclude the use of larger size of

aggregates beyond the congested reinforcement in the
same member; the size of aggregates may be reduced
around congested rein.forceme.nt to comply with this
provision.
When splicing of welded wire fabric is t6 be
carried out, lap splices of wires shall be made
so that overlap measured between the extreme
cross wires shall be not lesS than the spacing of
cross wires plus 100 mm.
b) Greater horizontal distance than the mil1imum,

specified in (a) should be provided wherever
possible. However when needle vibrators are
. g) In case of bundled bars, lapped splices of

bundled bars shall be made by splicing one bar
45
IS 456: 2000
26.4 Nominal Cover to Reinforcement
used the horizontal distance between bars of a

group may be reduced to two-thirds the
nominal maximum size of the coarse aggregate,
provided that sufficient space is left betWeen
groups of bars to enable the vibrator to be
immersed.
26.4.1 Nominal Cover

Nominal cover is the design depth of concrete cover
to all steel reinforcements, .including links. It is the
dimension used in design and indicated in the drawings.
It shall benot less than thediarneter of the bar.
c) Where there are two or more rows of bars, the

bars shall be vertically in line and the minimum
vertical distance between the bars shall be
15 mm, two-thirds the nominal'maximum size
of aggregate or the maximum size of bars,
whichever is greater.
26.4.2 Nominal Cover to Meet Durability Requirement

Minimum values for the nominal cover of normalweight aggregate concrete which
shOUld be provided
to all reinforcement, including links depending on the
condition of exposure described in 8.2.3 shall be as
given in Table 16.
26.3.3 Maximum Distance Between Bars in Tension
26.4.2.1 However for ,a longitudinal reinforcing

bar in a column nominal cover shall in any case not
be less than 40 mm, or less than' the diameter of
such bar. In the case of columns of minimum
dimension of200 mm or under, whose reinforcing bars
do not exceed 12 mm, a nominal cover of 25 mm may
be used.
Unless the calculation of crack widths shows that a

greater spacing is acceptable, the folloWing rules shall
be applied to flexuriil members in nonnal internal or
external conditions of exposure:
a) Beams - The horizontal distance between

parallel reinforcement bars, or groups, near the
tension face of a beam shan not be greater
than the valuegiv!,n in Table 15 depending on . 26.4.2.2 For footings minimum cover
shall be 50mm.
the amount of redistribution carried out in . 26.4.3 Nominal Cover to Meet
Specified Period of
analysis and the characteristic strength of the Fire Resistance
reinforcement.
Minimum values of nominal cover of nonnal-weight
b) Slabs
aggregate concrete to be provided to all reinforcement
including links to meet specified period of fire
1) The horizontal distance between parallel main
resistahce shall begiven in Thble 16A.
reinforcement bars shall notbemore than three
times the ,effective depth of solid slab or 26,5 Requirements of Reinforcement for
Structural Members
300 mm whichever is smaller.
2) The horizontal distance between parallel
reinforcement bars provided against
shrinkage and temperature shall not be more
than five times the effective depth of a solid
slab or 450 mm whichever is smaller.
26.5.1 Beams
26.5.1.1 Tension reinforrement
a) Minimum reinforcement-The minimum area of
tension reinforcement shall be not less than that
Table 15 Clear Distance Between Bars
(Clause 26.3.3)
Percenfage Redistribution to or from Section Considered
f,
- 30
- 15 .
+ 15
+30
Cleat;' Distance Between Bars

N/mm2
.mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
250
215
260
300
300
300
415
. 125
155
180
210
235
500
105
130
150
175
195
Nom - The spacings given in the table are not applicable to menbers subjected to
particularly aggressive envjronments unless in the
calculation of the mo:ment of resistance•.fy has been limited to 300 N/mm1 in limit
state design and 0'111 limited to 165 N/mm2 in working
stress design.
46
IS 456: 2000
Table 16 Nominal Cover to Meet Dnrability Roquirements
(Clau.s~
26.4.2)
Exposure
Mild
Nominal Concrete Cover in mm not Less Than
Moderate
30
Severe
45
Very severe
50
75
20
Extreme
NOTES
. 1 Fo~ main reinforcement up to 12 mm diameter bar for mild exposure the nominal
coverrnay be redqced by 5 rom.
2 Unless specified otherwise, actual concrete cover should not deviate from the
required nominal cover by +10 lIun
3 FOf exposure condition 'severe' and 'very severe', reduction of 5 mm filly ~

made, where CQDcrete grade is M35 and above.
Table16A
Nominal Cover to Meet Specified Period of Fire Resistance
(Claus~s 21.4 and 26.4.3 and Fig. 1)
Nominal Cover
'ire
Resis-
0.5
1
1.5
2
Simply
supported
Continuous
mm
20
20
20
:!Q.
60
70
3
4
Ribs
Slabs
Beams
tance
Simply
Columns
Simply
supported
Continuous "
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
20
20
20
20
20
25
20
20
20
20
20
30
.11
20
20
20
25
:!Q.
45
.11
55
50
55
45
65
40
40
40·
40
40
40
Continuous
supported
35
45
.11
45
55
NOTES
1 The nominal covers given relate specifically to the minimum member dimensions
giyen in Fig.J.
2 Cases that lie below the bold line require attention to th~ additional measures
necessary to reduce th~ risks?f spal1ing(se~ 21.3.1).
given by the following:
26.5.1.3 Side face reinforcement
Where the depth of the web in a beam exceeds 750 mm,

. side face reinforcement shall be provided along the two
bd
fy
faces. The total area of such reinforcement shall be not
less than 0.1 percent of the Web area alld shall be
where
distributed equally on t~o faces at a spacing
A~ ::::. minimum area 'of tension reinforcement,
not exceeding 300 mm or .web thickness whichever IS
less. . . .
.
b = breadth of beam or the breadth of the web
ofT-beam;
26.5.1.4 Transverse reinforcement in beams for shear
and torsion
'
d = effective depth, and
.6. = 0.85
= characteristic strength of reinforcement in

'N/mm'.
.
f.
b) Maximum reinfon:emen(~The maximum area of

tension reinfon::ement shall not exceed 0.04 hD.
The transverse reinforcement in beams shall be t*en

around the outer-most tension and compression bars.
In T-beams and I-beams, such reinforcement shall pa;s
around longitudinal bars located close to the outer face
of the flange.
26.5.1.2 Compression reinfon:ement
26.S.1.S Maximum spacing oishear reinforcement
The maximum area of compression reinforcement

shall not exceed 0.04 bD. Compression reinforcement
The maximum spacing of shear reinforcement

measured idong the axis of the member shall not exceed' .
0.75 d for vertical stirrups and dfor iticlilted stirrups
at 45", where d is the effective depth of the seclion
in beams shall be enclosed by stirrups for effective

lateral restraint. The arrangement of stirrnps shall be
as specified in 26.5.3.2.
47
_.,,;
IS 456: 2000
26.5.2 Slabs
under consideration. In no case shall the spacing

exceed 300 mm.
The rules given in 26.5.2.1 and 26.5.2.2 shall apply

to slabs in addition to those given in the appropriate
clauses.
26.5.1.6 Minimum shear reinforcement

Minimum shear reinforcement in the form of stirrups
shall be provided such that:
26.5.2.1 Minimum reinforcement

The mild steel reinforcement in either direction in slabs
shall not be less than 0,15 percent of the total crosssectional area, However, this
value can be reduced to
0.12 percent when high strength deformed bars or
welded wire fabric are used.
where
A" = total cross-sectional area of stirrup legs

effective in shear,
26.5.2.2 Maximum diameter
s,' = stirrup spacing along Ihe length of the
The diameter of reinforcing bars shall not exceed one·

eight of the total thickness of the slab.
member,
= breadth of the beam or breadth of the
26.5.3 Columns
web of flanged beam, and
fy
= characteristic' strength of the stirrup , 26.5.3.1 Longitudinal reinforcement

,reinforcement in N/mm' which shall not
a) The cross"sectional area of longitudinal
be taken greater thanAI5 N/mm'.
reinforcement, shall be not less than 0.8 percent
nor more than 6 percent of the gross crosssectional area of the column,
Where the maximum shear stress calculated is less than

half the permissible value and in members of minor
structural importance such as lintels, this provision
need not be complied with.'
NOTE - The use of 6 percent reinforcement may involve
practical difficulties in placing and compacting of concrete;
hence lower percentage is reCQrnmended. Where bars from
2/i.S.1.7 Distribution of torsion reinforcement
the columns below have to be lapped with those in the
column under consideration, :the percentage of steel shall

usually riot exceed 4 percent.
When a member is designed for torsion (see 41 or

B·6) torsion reinforcement shall be provided as below:
b) In any column that has it larger cross-sectional

area than that required to support the load,
the minimum percentage of steel' shall be
based upon the area of concrete required to
resist the direct stress and not upon. the actual
area.
a) The transverse reinforcement for torsion shall

be rectangular closed stirrups placed perpendicular to the axis of the member; The
spacing
of the stirrups shan not exceed the least of
XI' Xl:Yl and 300mm, wherex j andYI are
c) The minimum number of longitudinal bars

provided in a column shall be four in rectangular
columns and six in circular columns,
d) The bars shall not be less than 12 mm in
diameter,
respectively the shott and long dimensions of

the stirrup,
b) Longitudinal reioforcement shall be placed as
close as is practicable to the corners of the cross·
section and in all cases, there shall be at least
one longitudinal bar in each corner of the ties,
When the cross-sectional dimension of the
member exceeds 450 mm, additional
longitudinal bars, shall be provided to satisfy the
requirements of minimum reinforcement and
spacing given in 26.5.1.3.
e) A reinforced concrete column having helical

reinforcement shall have at least six bal's of
longitudinal reinforcement within the helical
reinforcement.
t) In a helically reinforced column, the longitudinal
bars shall be in contact with the helical
reinforcement and equidistant around its inner
circumference.
g) Spacing of longitudinal bars measured along
the periphery of the column shall not exceed
300mm.
h) In case of pedestals in which the longitudinal
reinforcement is not taken in account in strength
calculations, nominal longitudinal reinforcement
not less than 0,15 percent of the cross-sectional
area shall be provided.
26.5.1.8 Reil)forcell1ent in flanges of T-and,L-beams

shall satisfy the requirements in 23.1.1(b), Where
flanges are in tensio~, a part of the main tension
reinforcement shall be distributed over the effective
flange width or a Width equal to one-tenth ofthe span,
whichever is smaller. If the effective flange width
exceeds one· tenth of the span, nominal longitudinal
reinforcement shall be provided in the outer portions
of the flange.
48
IS 456: 2000
reinforcement need not, ho~ever, exceed
NOTE - Pedestal is n compression member, the effective

length of which does not ex.ceed three times the least lateral
dimension.
20 mm (see Fig. 11).

c)
26.5.3.2 Transverse reinforcement

a) General-A reinforced concrete compression
Pitch and diameter of lateral ties

1) Pitch-The pitch of transverse reinforce-
ment shall be not more than the least of the

following distances:
member shaJl have transverse or helical

reinforcement so disposed that every longitudinal bar nearest to the compression
face
has effective lateral support against buckling
subject to provisions in (b). The effective lateral
support is given by· transverse reinforcelllent
either in the form of circular rings capable of
taking up· drcUlllferentiRi tension or by
polygonal links (lateral ties) with internal angles
not exceeding 135 0 • The ends of the transverse
reinforc.ernent shull be properly anchored
[slie 26.2.2.4 (b)).
. .
i)
The least lateral dimension of the
compression members;
. il)
Sixteen times the smallest diameter of

.the longitudinal reinforcement bar to be
tied; and
iii) 300mm.
2) Diameter-The diameter .of the polygonal

links or lateral ties shall be not less than onefourth of the diameter of the
largest
longitudinal bar, and in no caSe less than
l6mm ..
b) Arrangement of transverse reinforcement

1) If the longitudinal bars are not spaced more
than 75 mm on, either side, transverse
c\
reinforcement need only to go round corner
and alternate bars for the purpose of
providing effective lateral· supports
(see Fig. 8).
d) Helical reinforcement
I) Pitch-Helical reinforcement shall be of

regular formation with the turns of the helix
spaced evenly and its ends shall be anchored
properly by providing one and a half extra
turns of the spiral bar. Where an increased
load on the column on the strength of the
helical reinforcement is allowed for, the pitch
of helical turns shall be notmore than75 mm,
nor, more than one-sixth of the cored!ameter
of the column, nor less than 25·mm, nor less
than three times the diameter of the steel bar
forming the helix. In other ca~es. the
requirements of 26.5.3.2 shall be complied
with.
2) Ifthe longitudinal bars spaced at a distance

ofnot exceeding 48titrtes the diameter of
the tie are effectively tied in two directions,
additionallongitudihal bar.s in between these .
bars need to be tied in one direction by open
ties (see Fig. 9).
3) Where the longitudinal reinforcing bars in
a compression member are placed in more
thanone row,.effectiye \ateralsupportlp ·the .
longiitidinalbars in the inner rows may be
. assumed have been provideq if:
to
j) transverse reinforcement is provided for
2) The diameter of ihe helical reinforcement

shall bejnaccordance~ith26.S.3.2(c) (2).
26.5.3.3 In columns where I~ngitudinalbarsare offset

at a splice, the slope ofthe inclined portion of the bar
. with the axis of the column shall hot exceed I in 6,
ii) no bar of the inner ro:ov is doser to the
and the portions of the bar above and below. the offset
nearest. c.ompression· face than three
shall be parallel to the axis of the column. Ad~quate
tillles the diameter of the largest bar in
horizontal support at the offset bends shall be treated
the inner row (see Fig. 10).
as a matter of design, and shall b~ provided by metal
4) Where the longitudinal bars in a com- ties,spitals;or parts ofth'" floor
construction; Metal
. pression member ate grouped (not in .. . ties or spirals So designed shall be
placed near (not
conlad) and,eaoh group adequately tied with· more than eight-bardiametersfrolll)
the point of bend.
. tratiSVerSe reinforeentent in accordance with .The horizontal thrust to be
resisted shall be assumed
. •. 26.5.3.2, the tratisverse reinforcement for the as one and half times the
horizontal components of
.conipression .lIlember as a Whole may be the nominal stress.in the inclined
portion of the bar.
provided on the assumption that each group . Offsetbars shaH he hentbefore they are
placed in the
is a single longitudinal bar for purpose of forms. Where colunin faces are
offset75mm· or more,
determining the pitch and diameter of the splices of vertical bars adjacent to the
offset face shall
transverse reinforcement in accordance with be made by separate dowels overlapped
as specified
26.5.3.2. The diameter of such transverse in 26.2.5.1.
the outer-most row il\ accordance with.
26.5.3.2;. and
49
IS 456: 2000
27 EXPANSION JOINTS
27.1 Structures in which marked changes in plan
dimensions take place abruptly shall be provided with
expansion on joints at the section where such changes
occur. Expansion joints shall be so provided that the
necessary movement occurs with a minimum
resistance at the joint. The structures adjacent to the
joint should preferably be supported on separate
columns or walls but not necessarily on separate
foundations. Reinforcement shall not extend across
an expansion joint and the break between the sections
shall be complete.
27.2 The details as to the length of a structure where

expansion joints have to be provided can be determined
after taking into consideration various factors, such as
temperature, exposure to weather, the time and season'
of the laying of the concrete, etc. Normally structures
exceeding 45 m in length are designed with one or
more expansion joints. However in view of the large
number of factors involved in deciding the location,
spacing and nature of expansion joints, the provision
of expansion joint in reinforced cement concrete
structures should be left to the discretion of the
designer. IS 3414 gives the design considerations,
which need to be examined and provided for.
~ MI
If-
\,;.
.tr
~ 75
.:!;15
rr
Hl
~ 4S.tr
AU dim~nsiolls in mi1llmetres.
All dimensions in milJimetres.

FIG. 8
FIG. 9.
PRANSVERSE REINFORCE"! ENT
DIAMETER.
- - { - - - , I - -_ _- ,
••• j - '
v~
"G-
C)
o>
/1\
~; 1'1
.~
~"
h ('
/
V,NDIVI DUAL GROUPS
AU dimensions in millimetres.
FIG. 11
FIG. 10
50
IS 456: 2000
SECTION 4 SPECIAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURAL
MEMBERS AND SYSTEMS
28 CONCRETE CORBELS
28.2.4 Resistance to Applied Horizontal Force
28.1 General
Additional reinforcement connected to the supported

member should be provided to transmit this force in
its entirety.
A corbel is a short cantilever projection which supports

a load bearing member and where:
a) the distance a, between the line of the reaction
to the supported load and the root of the corbel
is less than d (the effective depth of the root of
the corbel); and
29 DEEP BEAMS
29.1 General
a) A beam shall be deemed to be a deep beam when
the ratio of effective ~pan to overaIl depth, ~
b) the depth at the outer edge of the contact area

of the supported load is not less than one-half
of the depth at the root of the corbel.
is less than:
1) 2.0 for a simply supported beam; and
The depth of the corbel at the face of the support is

determined in accordance with 40.S.1.
2) 2.5 for a continuous beam.

b) A deep beam complying with the requirements
of 29.2 and 29.3 shaIl be deemed to satisfy the
provisions for shear.
28.2 Design
28.2.1 Simplifying Assumptions

The concrete and reinforcement may be assumed to
act as elements of a simple strut-and-tie system, with
the following guidelines:
a) The magnitude of the resistance provided to
horizontal force should be not less than one-half
of the design vertical load on the corbel
29.2 Lever Arm

The lever arm z for a deep beam shall be detemined as
below:
a) For simply supported beams:
z = 0.2 (l + 2D)
. (see also 28.2.4).

b) Compatibility of strains between the strut-andtie at the corbel root should be
ensured.
when 1
",.!..
;; 2
D'
or
z = 0.61
It should be noted that the horizontal link requirement

described in 2I1J.,~ ,will ensure satisfactory serviceability performance.
I ' ,
when D <1
b) For continuous beams:
z = 0.2 (I + 1.5 D)
28.2.2 Reinforcement Anchorage
when 1", D'" 2.5
or
At the front face of the corbel, the reinforcement should

be anchored ,either by:
z = 0.5 I
a) welding to a transverse bar of equal strength in this case the bearing area of
the load should
stop short of the face of the support by a distance
equal to the cover of the tie reinforcement, or
when
I
D
<1
where I is the effective span taken as centre to centre

distance between supports or 1.15 times the clear span,
whichever is smaller, and D is the overall depth.
b) bending back the bars to form a loop - in this

case the bearing area of the load should
not project beyond the straight portion of
the bars forming the main tension reinforcement.
29.3 Reinforcement
29.3.1 Positive Reinforcement

The tensile reinforcement required to resist positive
bending moment in any span of a deep beam shall:
28.2.3 Shear Reinforcement
a) e"tend without curtailment between supports;
Shear reinforcement should be provided in the form

of horizontal links distributed in the upper two-third
of the effective depth of root of the corbel; this
reinforcement should be not less than one-half of the
area of the main tension reinforcement and should be
adequately anchored.
b) be embedded beyond the face of each support,

so that at the face of the support it shaIl have a
development length' not less than 0.8 Ld;where
Ld is the development length (see 26.2.1), for
the design stress in the reinforcement; and .
51
IS 456: 2000
c) be placed within a zone of depth equal to
0.25 D - 0.05 I adjacent to the tension face of
the beam where D is the overall depth and I is
the effective span.
29.3.2 Negative Reinforcement

a) Termination of reinforcement - For tensile
reinforcement required to resist negative
bending moment over a support of a deep beam:
The moments and forces due to design loads on .

continuous slabs may be obtained by the methods given
in Section 3 for solid slabs. Alternatively, the slabs
may be designed as a series of simply supported spans
provided they are not exposed to weather or corrosive
conditions; wide cracks may develop at the supports
and the engineer shall satisfy himself that these will
not impair finishes or lead to corrosion of the
b) Distribution-When ratio of clear span to

overall depth is in the range 1.0 to 2.5, tensile
reinforcement.
reinforcement over a support of a deep beam

shall be placed in two zones comprising:
30.3 Shear
I) a zone of depth 0.2 D, adjacent to the tension

face, which shall contain a proportion of the
tension steel given by
Where hollow blocks are used, for the purpose

of calculating shear stress, the rib width may be
increased to take account of the wall thickness of the
block on one side of the rib; with narrow precast units,
the width of the jointing mortar or eoncrete may be
included.
(~ - 0.5)
where
I
D
2)
=
=
c) With a continuous top and bottom face but

containing voids of rectanglilar, oval or
other shape.
30.2 Analysis of Structure
I) It shan be permissible to terminate not more
than half of the reinforcement at a distance
of 0.5 D from the face of the support where
D is as defined in 29.2; and
2) The remainder shall extend over the fun
span.
0.5
structure; the top of the ribs may be connected

by a topping of concrete of the same strength as
that used in the ribs; and
clear span, and

3004 Detlectlon
overall depth.
The recommen<lations for deflection in "especlof solid

slabs may be applied to ribbed, hollow block orvoided
conso·uetion. The span toeffectivedepth ratios given
in 23.2 for a flanged beam are applicabl~ but when
calculating the final reduction factor for web width,
the rib width for hollow block slabs may be assumed
to include the walls of the blocks on both sides of the
rib. For voided slabs and slabs constructed of box or
I -section units, aneffeclive rib width shall be calculated
assuming all material below the upper flange of the
unit to be concentrated in a reCtangular rib haVing the
.
same cross-sectional area and depth.
a zone measuring 0.3 D on either side of

the mid-depth of the beam, which shall
contain the remainder of the tension steel,
evenly distributed.
For spanto depth ratios less than unity, the
steel shall be evenly distributed over .a
depth of 0.8 D measured from the tension
face.
29.3.3 Vertical Reiriforcement

Ifforces are applied to a deep beam in such a way that
hanging action is required, bars or suspension stirrups
shall be provided to carryall the forces concerned.
30.5 Size and Position of Ribs
29.3.4 Side Face Reinforcement

Side face reinforcement shall comply with requirements of minimum reinforcement of
walls (see 32.4).
In-situ ribs shall be not less than 65 mm wide. They

shall be spaced at centres not greater than 1.5 m apart
and their depth, excluding any topping, shall be not
more than four times their width. Generally ribs shan
be formed along each edge parallel to the span of one
way slabs. When the edge is built into a wall or rests
on a beam, a rib at least as wide as the bearing shall be
formed along the edge.
30 RIBBED,HOLLOWBLOCK OR VOIDED SLAB

30.1 ('""neral
This covers the slabs constructed in one of the ways
described below:
a) As a series of concrete ribs with topping cast on
forms which may be removed after the concrete
has set;
30.6 Hollow Blocks and I<'ormers

Blocks and formers may be of any suitable material.
Hollow clay tiles for the filler type shall conform to
IS 3951 (Part I). When required to contribute to the
b) As a series of concrete ribs between precast

blocks which remain part of the completed
52
IS 456 : 2000
to II' measured centre to centre of supports.
structural strength of a slab they shall:

a) be made of concrete or burnt clay; and
b) Middle strip - Middle strip means a design strip

bounded on each of its opposite sides by the
column strip.
. b) have a crushing strength of at least 14 N/mm'
measured on the net section when axially loaded

in the direction of compressive stress in the slab.
c) Panel- Panel means that part of a slab hounded

on each of its four sides by the centre-Ilne of a
column or centre-lilies of adjacent spans.
30.7 Arrangement of Reinforcement

The recommendations given in 26.3 regarding
maximum distance between bars apply to areas of solid
concrete in this form of construction. The curtailment,
anchorage and cover to reinforcement shall be as
described below:
a) At least 50 percent of the tolal main
reinforcement shall be carried through at the
bottom on to the bearing and anchored in
accordance with 26.2.3.3.
b) Where a slab, which is continuous over supports,
has been designed as simply suppolted,
reinforcement shall be provided over the support
to control cracking. This reinforcement shall
have a cross~sectional area of not less tha~ Ol)equarter that required in the
middle of the
adjoining spans and shall exlend at least onetenth of the clear span into adjoining
spans.
c) In slabs with pennanenl blocks, the side cover
to the reinforcement shall not be less than
10 mm. In all other cases, cover shall be
provided according to 26.4.
30.8 Preeasts Joists and Hollow Filler Blocks

The construction with precast joists and hollow
concrete filler blocks shall conform to IS 6061 (Part
1) and precastjoistand hollow clay filler blocks shall
conform toIS 6061 (Part 2).
.
31 FLAT SLABS
31.1 General
The tenn flat slab means a reinforced concrete slab
with or without drops, supported generally without
beams, by columns with or without flared column
heads (see Fig. 12). A flat slab may be solid slab or
may have recesses fOf1lled on the soffit so that the soffit
comprises a series of ribs in two directions. The
recesses may be formed by removable or pelmanent
31.2 Proportioning
31.2.1 Thickness aj Flat Slab

The thickness of the flat slab shall be generally
control1ed by considerations of span to effective depth
ratios given in 23.2.
For slabs with drops conforming to 31.2.2, span to
effective depth ratios given in 23.2 shall be applied
directly; otherwise the span to effective depth ratios
obtained in accordance with provisions in 23.2 shal1
be mUltiplied by 0.9. For this purpose, the longer span
shall be considered. The minimum thickness of slab
shall be 125 nlln.
.. 31.2.2 Drop
The drops when provided s~all be rectangular in plan,
and have a length in each direction not less tlmn onethird of the pan.ellength in
that direction. Por exterior
panels,the width of drops at "tight angles to the noncontinllonsedge and measured
from the centre-line of
the columns shall be equal t6 one-half tli" ~jdth of
.drop forinterior panels.
31.2.3 Column Heads

Where column heads are provided, that portion of a .
column head which lies within the largest right circular .
cone or pyramid that has a vertex angle of 900 0nd can
be included entirely within the outlines of the column
and the column head, shall be considered for design
purposes (see Pig. 12).
31.3 Determination of Bending Moment
31.3.1 Methods of Analysis and Design

It shall be permissible to design the slab system by
one of the following methods:
a) The direct design method as specified in 31,4,
and
b) The equivalent frame method as specified
in 31.5.
filler blocks.
31.1.1 For the purpose of this clause, the following
definitions shall apply:
a) Calumn strip - Column strip means a design
strip having a width of 0.25 I" but ItOt greater
than 0.25 Ii on each side of the column centreline, where I,"is the span in the
direction
moments are being determined, measured centre
to centre of supports and I, is the span transverse
In each case the applicable limitations given in 31.4

and 31.5 shaU be met
31.3.2 Bending Maments ill Panels with Marginal

Beams ar Walls
Where the slab is supportedby"a marginal beam with
a deptJi greater than 1.5 times the thickness of the slab,
or by a wall, then:
53
IS 456: 2000
CRITICAL SECTION
FOR SHEAR
CRITICAL SECTION
FOR SHEAR
ADJACENT TO DROP
_.---1-+--.- CRITICAL SECTION FOR'

SHEAR IMMEDIATELY
ADJACENT TO COLUM
COLUMN
12 A SLAB WITHOUT DROP'" COLUMN

WITHOUT COLUMN HEAD
CRITICAL SECTION
FOR SHEAR
12 B SLAB WITH DROP 8. COLUMN

WITH COLUMN HEAD
~I
12 C SLAB WITHOUT DROP'" COL UMN

WITH COLUMN HEAD
NOTE -
Do is the diameter of column or column head to be considered fOf design and d is

effective depth of slab or drop as
appropriate,
FIG. 12 CRmcALSECTIONS PtJR SHEAR IN FLAT SLABS
a) the total load to be carried by the beam or wall

shall comprise those loads directly on the wall
or beam plus a uniformly distributed load equal
to one-quarter of the total load on the slab, and
A Slab width between lines that are one and one-half

slab or drop panel thickness;.1.5 D, on' each side of
the column or capital may be considered effective, D
being the size of the column.
b) the bending moments on the half-column strip

adjacent to the beam or wall shall be one-quarter
of the bending moments for the first interior
column strip.
Concentration of reinforcement Over column head by ,

closer spacing or additional reinforcement may be used
to resist the moment on this section:
31.4 Direct Design Method,
31.3.3 Transfer ofBending Moments to Columns

31.4_1 Limitations
When unbalanced gravity load, wind, earthquake, or

other lateral loads cause transfer of bending moment
between slab and column, the flexural stresses shall
be investigated using a fraction, ()( of the moment given
by:
Slab system designed by the direct design method shall

fulfil the following conditions:
a) There shall be minimum of three continuous
spans in each direction,
b) The panels shall be rectangular, and the ratio of
the longer span to the shorter span within a panel
shall not be greater than 2.0,
()( - --::-7='=
-I+~tx
c) It shall be permissible to offset columns to a

maximum of 10 percent of the span in the
direction of the offset notwithstanding the
provision in (b),
where
al
a,
=:
of
overall dimension the critical section

for shear in. the direction in which
moment acts, and
d) The successive span lengths in each direction

shall not differ by more than one-third of the
longer span. The end' spans may be shorter but
not longer than the interior spans, and
= overall dimension of the critical section

for shear transverse to the direction in
which moment acts.
54
IS 45/1 : 2000
e) TIle design live load shall not exceed three times
the design dead load.
Exterior negative design moment:
0.65
'--1-
31.4.2 Total Design Moment for a Span

31.4.2.1 In the direct design method, the total design
moment, for a span shall be determined for a strip
bounded laterally by Ibe centre-line of the panel on
each side of the centre-line of Ibe supports.
31.4.2.2 The absolute sum ofthe positive and· average
negative bending moments in each direction shall be
taken as:
M = WIn
where
Mu = total moment;
W = design load on an area I, I,;
I, = clear span extending from face to face of
columns, capitals, brackets or walls, but
not less than 0.65 I,;
I, - length of span in Ibe direction of M,,; and

I, = length of span transverse to I,.
. 31.4.2.3 Circular supports shall be treated as square
supports having Ibe same area.
31.4.2.4 When Ibe transverse span of Ibe panels on
either side of the centre-line of supports varies, I, shall
be taken as the ave~age of Ibe transverse spans.
31.4.2.5 When the span adjacentand parallel to an edge
is being considered, Ibe distance from the edge to the
centre-iine of the panel shall be substituted for I,
in 31.4.2.2.
31.4.3 Negative and Positive Design Moments
31.4.3.1 The negative design moment shall be located
at the face of rectangular supports, circular supports
being treated as square supports having the same
area.
31.4.3.2 In an interior span, Ibe total design moment
M shall be distributed in Ibe following proportions:
"Negative design moment

Positive design moment
a,
a, is the ratio of flexural stiffness of the exterior

columns to the flexural stiffness of Ibe slab at a joint
taken in the direction moments are being determined
and is given by
J:Kc
()( = - ,
K,
where
K, = sum of the flexural stiffness of the
columns meeting at thejoint; and
1+-
0.65
0.35
31.4.3.3 In an end span, the total design moment M"

shall be distributed in Ibe following proportions:
K, = flexural stiffness of Ibe slab, expressed

as moment per. unit rotation.
31.4.3.4 It shall be permissible to modify these design
moments by up to \0 percent. so long as Ibe total design
moment, M" forlbe panel in the direction considered
is not less than Ibat required by 31.4.2.2.
31.4.3.5 The negative moment section shan be
designed to resist the larger ofthe two interior negative
design moments detennined for the spans framing into
a common support unless an analysis is made to
distribute the unbalanced moment in accordance with
Ibe stiffness of Ibe adjoining parts.
31.4.4 Distribution of Bending Momems Across the
Panel Width
.
Bending moments at critical cross-section shall be
distributed to the column strips and middle strips as
specified in 31.5.5 as applicable.
31.4.5 Moments in Columns
31.4.5.1 Columns built integ~ally with the slab system
shall be designed to resist moments arising from loads
on the slab system.
31.4.5.2 At an interior support, the supporting
members above and below the slab shan be designed\
to resist !be moment M given by the following equation,
in direct proportion to Ibeir stiffnesses unless a general
analysis is made:
Interio~ negative design moment:
0.75-
O.l~
1+-
. a,
where
positive design moment:
0.63- 0.2~
1+-
a,
55
W d, W,
= design dead and live loads

respectively, per unit area;
I,
= length <if span transverse to the

direction of M;
IS 456: 2000
I.
length of the clear span in the

direction of M, measured face to face
of supports;
b) Each such frame may be analyzed in its entirety,

or, for vertical loading, each floor thereof and
the roof may be analyzed separately with its
columns being assumed fixed at their remote
ends. Where slabs are thus analyzed separately,
it may be assumed in determining the bending
moment at a given support that the slab is fixed
at any support two panels distant therefrom
provided the slab continues beyond the point.
'LK
a, =
L.K' where K, and K, are as defined
in 31.4.3.3; and
w:',1'2 and
t:, refer to the shorter span.
31.4.6 Effects of Pattern Loading
c) For the purpose of determining relative stiffness

. of members, the moment of inertia of any slab
or column may be assumed to be that of the
gross cross~section of the concrete alone.
In the direct design method, when the ratio oflive load

to dead load exceeds 0.5 :
a) the sum of the flexural stilfnessos of the columns

above and below the slab, LK" shall be such
that ot, is not less than the appropriate minimum
value (Xc min specified in Table 17, or
d) Variations of moment of inertia along the axis

of the slab on account of provision of drops shall
be taken into account. In the case of recessed
or coffered slab which is made solid in ihe
region of the columns, the stiffening effect may
be ignored provided the solid part of the slab
does not extend more than 0.15 lof' into the span
measured from the centre-line oflhe columns.
The stiffening effect of flared column heads may
be ignored.
b) if the sum of the flexural stiffnesses of the

columns, 2J<" does not satisfy (a), the positive
design moments for the panel shalI be multiplied
by the coefficient p. given by the following
equation:
p. =
.
I+[·~. ](I- a;~nJ
..
wI·.
31.5.2 Loading Pattern
31.5.2.1 Whim the loading pattern is known,· the

structure shall be analyzed for the load concerIied.
..
ot, is the ratio of flexural stiffnessofthecolurnns above

and below the slab to the flexural stiffness of the slabs
at a joint taken in the direction moments are being
determined and is given by;
Table 17 Minimum Permissible Values of, ot,

. (Clause 31.4.6)
'E,·K,
ot =-._...
,
'LK
where K, and K, are flexural stiffn~sses~fcolumn and

.
slab respectively.
Rati~fl..
V~ue of 0:" mho
(I)
(2)
(3)
0.5
1.0
1.0
0.5 to 2.0
0
0.6
0.7
0.7
0.8
La
31.5 Equivaleut Frame Method
31.5.1 Assumptions·
The bending moments and shear forces may be
determined by an analysis of the structure as a·
continuous frame and the following assumptions may
be made:
a)
Imposed LoadIDead Load
The structure shall be considered to be made up

of equivalent frames on column lines taken
longitudinally and transver~ely through the
building. Each frame consists of a row of
equivalent columns or supports, bounded
laterally by the centre-line of the panel on each
side of the centre-line of the columns or
supports. Frames adjacent and parallel to an edge
shall be bounded by the edge and the centreline of the adjacent panel.
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3,0
I,
0.5
0.8
1.0
'125
2.0
0.5
. 0;8
1.0
1.25
2.0
0.5
0.8
1.0
1.25
2.0
1.2
1.3
1.5
1;6
1.9
4.9
1.8
2.0
2.3
2.8
13.0
31.5.2.2 When the live load is variable but does not

exceed three-quarters of the dead load, or the nature
of the live load is such that all panels will be loaded
simultaneously, the maximum moments may be
assumed to occur at all sections when full design live
load is on the entire slab system.
56
IS 456: 2000
31.5.2.3 For other conditions of live load/dead load
ratio and when all panels are not loaded simultaneously:
a) maximum positive moment near midspan of a
panel may be assumed to occur when threequarters of the full design live load is on
the
panel and on alternate panels; and
b) maximum negative moment in the slab at a
support may be assumed to occur when threequarters of the full design live load is
on the
adjacent panels only.
greater than three-quarters of the value of I" the

length of span transverse to the direction
moments are being determined, the exterior
negative moment shall be considered to be
uniformly distributed across the length· I,.
31.5.5.3 Column strip: Positive moment for each span

For each span, the column strip shall be designed to
resist 60 percent of the total positive moment in the
panel.
31.5.5.4 Moments in the middle strip
31.5.2.4 In no case shall design moments be taken to

be less than those occurring with full design live load
on all panels.
The middle strip shall be designed on the following

bases:
a) That portion of the design moment not resisted
by the column strip shall be assigned to the
adjacent middle strips.
31.5.3 Negative Design Moment

31.5.3.1 At interior supports; the critical section for
negative moment, in both the column strip and middle
strip, shall be taken at the face of rectilinear supports,
but in no case at a distance greater than 0.175 I, from
the centre of the column where I, is the length ofthe
span in the direction moments are being determined,
measured centre-to-centre of supports.
b) Each middle strip shall be proportioned to resist

the sum of the moments assigned to its two half
middle strips.
c) The middle strip adjacent and parallel to an edge
supported hy a wall. shall be proportioned to
resist twice the moment assigned to half the
middle strip corresponding to the first row of
31.5.3.2 At exterior supports provided with brackets

interior columns.
or capitals, the critical section for negative moment in .
the direction perpendicular to the edge shall be taken
31.6 Shear in Flat Slab
at a distance from the face of the supporting element
not greater than one-half the projection of the bracket 31.6.1 The critical section
for shear shall be at a
distance dl2 from the periphery of the coluinnlcapitalf
or capital beyond the face of the supporting element.
drqp panel, perpendicular to the plane of the slab where
31.5.3.3 Circular or regular polygon shaped supports
d is the effective depth of the section (see. Fig. 12).
shall be treated as square supports having the same
The shape in plan is geometrically similar to the.suppOit
area.
immediately below the slab (see Fig. 13A and 13B).
NOm-For column sections with re~entrnnt angies. the critical
section shall be taken as indicated in Fig. i3e and 13D.
31.5.4 Modification of Maximum Moment

,
Moments determined by means of the equivalent frame

method, for slabs which fulfil the limitations of 31.4
may be reduced in such proportion that the numerical
silm of the positive andaveragenegativemoments is
notless than the value of total design mOJllent M"
specified in 31.4.2.2.
.
31.6.1.1 In the case of columns near the free edge of

a slab, the critical section shall be taken as shown in
Fig. 14.
31.6.1.2 When openings in· flat slabs are located at a
distance less than ten times the thickness theslab
from a concentrated reaction or when the openings are
located within the column strips, the' critical sections
specified in 31.6.1 shall be modifiedso thafthe part of
the periphery of the critical section which is enclosed
by radial projections ofthe openings the centroid of
the reaction area shaH be considered ineffective
(see Fig. 15), and openings shall not encroach upon
column head.
of
31.5.5 Distribution of Bending Moment Across the
Panel Width
31.5.5.1 Column strip: Negative moment at an interior
support
to
At an interior support, the column strip shall be

designed to resist75 percent of the total negative
moment in the panel at that suppon.
31.6:2 Calculation of Shear Stress
31.5.5.2 Column strip: Negative moment at an exterior

support
The shear stress 1v shall be the sum of the values
calculated according to 31.6.2.1 and 31.6.2.2.
a) At an.e~terior support, the column strip shall be

designed to resist the total negative moment in
the panel at that support.
.
31:6.2.1 The nominal shear stress in flat slabs shaH be

taken as V I b"d where Vis the shear force duelo design
load, b" is the periphery of the critical sectioil anCidis
b) Where the exterior support consists of a column

or a wall extending for a distance equal to or
the effective depth;

57
.
IS 456: 2000
,..-------liCRITICAL
:
I
SECTION
I
II
I
..•. '.......:.:. '.

.:.j.' .• : ....:
'''', " :", -' .4~

..............
,
. __~ I
L_
-~dll
_
d/2
SUPPORT
f'
SECTION
SUPPORT SECTION
COLUMN ICOLUMN HEAD'
13 A
SUPPORT
SECTION
'Jrr C~{T~CAL
SECTION
r-I
'
..
:' .... :
'"
t'fj'.'~:
I
)~
II
! f
..... . \/::.
.... ti'
L,-"-';;--1
; ., \
.;~:'~\·i.··l)?
~::
d/2
"
dl2
Nom - d is the effective depth, of the flat slab/drop.

FIG. 13 CRrnCAL SBCI'IONS IN PLAN FOR SHEAR IN FLAT SLABS
FREE
CORNER
/;FRE.E
EDGE
.I
I
I
CRITICAL
SECTION
V
t' .. .'~,:~~,
,.:;.....
....... ....' '. AI't'
~'"
...
II>, ...... "
I ~__
d/2,
L __ ~_
-J~/2~-- r'
CORNER
COLUMN
14A
'
CRITICAL
SECTION
14 B
FiG. 14 EFFECT OF FREE EDGES ON CRrneAL SBCI'ION FOR SHEAR
value of IX shall be obtained from the equation given

in 31.3.3.
31.6.2.2 When unbalanced gravity load. wind.

earthquake or other forces cause transfer of bending
, moment between slab and column. a fraction (I - a)
of the moment shall be considered transferred by
eccentricity of the shear about the centroid of the
critical section. Shear stresses shall be taken as varying
linearly about the centroid of the critical section. The
31.6.3 Permissible Shear Stress
31.6.3.1 When shear reinforcement is not provided.

the calculated shear stress at the critical section shall
not exceed ks"'c'
58
IS 456: 2000
i---o-f- SUBTRACT FROM
OPENING
OPENING
PERIPHERY
COLUMN
lr--d/2
,."......41~
t
I
I
~RITICAL
d/2
--
158
_.....,../OPENING
~I
r---- -- -
I
I
COLUMN
J , , • . •'
• : ....... : ••~
• 'tt.
~•
COLUMN
I'
I
:.~.: I:':
k-CRITICAL
I
" ... ~ ... ,
I
SECTION
IL.. _______ JI
SECTION
I
__ JI
15 A
I
...- CRITICAL
I
SECTION
I
1..._------1
If REGARD OPENING
AS FREE EDGE
15C
15 D
FIG. 15 EFFECf OF OPENINGS ON CRITICAL SECTION FOR SHEAR.
2 times the slab thickness, except where a slab is of

cellular or ribbed construction.
' .
where
k, = (0.5 + /3) but not greater than I, /3, being the
ratio of short side to long side of the column!
.
capital; and
31.7.2 Area of Reinforcement

When drop panels are used, the thickness of drop panel
for determination of area of reinforcement shall be the
lesser of the following;
,JY; in limit state method of design,

and 0.16 ,JY; in working stress method of
t, = 0.25
a) Thickness of drop, and'
design.
31.6.3.2 When the shear stress at the critical section
exceeds the value given in 31.6.3.1, but less than
1.5 't, shear reinforcement shall be provided. If the
b) Thickness of slab plus one quarter the distance

between edge of drop and edge of capitat
31.7.3 Minimum Length of Reinforcement

a) Reinforcement in flat slabs shall have the
minimum lengths specified in Fig.16. Larger
lengths of reinforcement shall be provided when
required by analysis.
shear stress exceeds 1.5 't" the flat slab shaH be

redesigned. Shear stresses shall be investigated at
successive sections more distant from the support and
shear reinforcement shall be provided up to a section
where the shear stress does not exceed 0.5 't e • While
designing the shear reinforcement, the shear stress
carried by the concrete shall be assumed to be 0.5 't,
and reinforcement shall catty the remaining shear.
b) Where adjacent spans are unequal, the extension

of negative reinforcement beyond eacb face of
the common column shall be based on the longer
span.
c) The length of reinforcement for slabs in frames
not bf1lced against sideways and for slabs
resisting lateral loads shall be determined by
analysis but shall not be less than those
prescribed in Fig. 16.
31.7 Slab Reinforcement
31.7.1 Spacing
The spacing of bars in a flat slab, shall not exceed
59
IS 456: 2000
w:Q ~ MINIMUM
. . 0.
IS::
In
ii\ ~ PERCENTAGE
,WITHOUT DROP PANEL
u OF STEEL
~ 9 AT- SECTION
PAN~L
WITH DROP
so
REMAINoeR
..
U'l'e
00
"
I'
""'"eOGE 'OF
DROP '.
I-c--l
I
I.
r-c--l
J-c __
~ ~~---------r~f,~------------------~t~~='5~m~m---m~.~.~.---------cn-f
!,, ~
~'" ~.. ~
..-
Q)
50
REMAINDER
;--,.0 "".
_e
'--c---l
--' a
!i."
'~ 0-IIS(
,,-'
II
m ...
ISO mm-..
~.,... r-Ig4-________~~~'~-A-'L'L-,-B-A-R-~--~~L~1 __~~----~c__.-~-.~-L-;B-~'-:~-

s_+~
50
REMAINDER
Ii
li
III ~
SO
2 ReMAINDER
,
EXTERIOR
SIJPPORT-
'\.
L.r:t1l::::;;;-:::.--(/
150 mm 1---,-
'\.
r-'I--I
'15 mm mall. -
'5. mm-
75 mM max.
W.t.
D ,-CLEAR SP"N-fn-~I--CLEAR SPAN-t..-- Dr.~
FACE -OF SUPPORT-'

INTERIOR SUPPQRT-
,. t
1....- -
It
,- - -M'
I -FACE OF SUPPORT-E;XTERrOR 5UPPORl--'
fCONlINUHV PROvtOEO)
INO -SLAB CONTINUITY)
(NO SLAB CONTINUity,
Bar Let}gth from Face of Support

.'
.
Mini1DumLength
MQrk
Length
"
0.141.
0.20 III ~
Maximum Length
e
f
0.20 I"
0.24 In
0.22/.
9.30 l~
0.33 In
*- BeJlt bars at exterior supports may be 'used if a general analysis is mnde.

NO'fE - D is ,the diarnett?r of the column and the dimension of the rectangular
column in the direction under
considemtion.
FIG. 16 MINIMUM BEND JOINT LOCATIONS AND EXTENSIONS FOR REINFORCEMENT

IN FuTSLABS
60
IS 456: 2000
31.7.4 Anchoring Reinforcement
a) All slab reinforceme!lt perpendicular to a
discontinuous edge shall have an anchorage
(straight. bent or otherwise anchored) past the
internal face of the spandrel beam. wall Or
column, of an amount:
I) For positive reinforcement ·-not less than
ISO mm except tbat witb fabric reinfQrcement having a fully welded transverse wire
directly over the support. it shall be
permissible to reduce. this length to one-balf
of the width of Ihe support or 50 mm.
whichever is greater; and
as per empirical procedure given in 32.2 .. The minimum

thickness of walls sball be 100 mm.
32.1.1 Guidelines or design of walls subjected to
horizontal and vertical loads are given in 32.3.
32.2 Empirical Design Method for Walls Snbjected
to Inplane Vertical Loads
32.2.1Braced Walls
Walls shall be assumed to be braced if they are laterally
supported by a structure in' which all.the follOwing
apply:
a) Walls or vertical braced elements are arranged
in two directions so as 10 provide lateral stability
to the structure as a whole.
2) For negative reinforcement- such that the.

design stress is developec) at the internal
face. in accordance with Bection 3,
b) Lateral forcesar¢ resisted by shearin the planes
b) Where the slab is notslipported byaspatidrel

beam or wall. or where the slab cantilevers
beyond tbe support. the ancborage shall be
obtained witliin the slab.
c) Floor and roof systems are designed to transfer

lateral forces ..
of these walls or by braced eleraents.
d) Connections between tbe wall altd thelateral

supports are designed toresista horizontal f"Oree
not less than
31.8 Openings in Flat Slabs

I) the simple static reactions to the total applied
Openings of any size may be provided in the flat slab
horizontal forces at the level of lateral
if it is shown by analysis that the requirements of
support; and ,
strength and serviceability are met. However. for
2) 2.5 percent of the total vertical load th.at the
openings conforming to the following. no special
wall is designed to carry at. the levO! of lateral
analysis is required.
. support.
a) Openings of any size may be placed within the
middle half of the span in each direction.
32.2.2 Eccentricity o/Vertical Load
provided the total amount of "reinforcement The design of awall shall take account
of the actual
. required 'for the panel without the opening is eccentricity ofthe vertical force
subject to a minimum
maintained.
.
value of 0.05 t.
b) . In the area common to two column strips. not , The vertical load transmitted
to a wall by a
more than one-eighth of the width of strip in .discontinuous coneretefloor or roof
shall be assumed.
either span shall be interrupted by the openings.
to act atone'third the' depth of the bearing area
The equivalentofreinforcement interrupted· measured from the span face of ~he wall.
Where there .
shall be added on all sides of the openings.
.is an in'situ concrete floor continuous 'over the wall.
c) In the area common to one column s\rip and one.
middle strip; not more than one'quarter. of the
reinforcement in either strip shall be interrupted
by the openings. The equivalent of reinforcement interrupted shall be added on all
sides
of the openings.
d) . The shear requirements of 31.6 shall be satisfied.
the load shall he 'assumed to. act ai the centre of the .

wall.
The resultant eccentridty of the total vetticalload,on
a braced wallatany levelbetwe¢n horizolltaUateral

supports. slian be calculated on the assumption that .
the resultant eCcentricity ofalI the vertical loads above
.
the upper support is Zero.
32.2.3 Maximum Effective Height to Thickness. Ratio
32 WALLS
The ratio of effective heightto thickness.

. H.,It shall
not exceed 30.
32.1 General
Reinforced con Grete walls subjected to direct
compression or combined flexure and direct
corapression should be designed in accordance with
Section 5 or Annel< B. provided the' vertical
reinforcement is provided in each Jace... araced walls
subjected to only vertical compression may be designed
32.2.4 Effective Height

The effective height of a braced wall shall betaken as
follows:'
.
.
iI) Where restrained against rotation at both ends
by
61
IS 456: 2000
[) floors
2) intersecting walls or
similar members
whicbever is the le.ser.
0.75 B. or
0.75L,
where
h) Where not restrained against rotation at both

ends by
[) floors
2) intersecting walls or
shear force due to design loads.
walllhickness.
= 0.8 X L. where L. is Ihe length of

the wall.
32.4.2.1 Under no circumstances shall the nominal

shear stress "t,. in walls exceed 0.17 1;. in limit state
method and 0.121;, in ~orking stress method.
l.OB. or
l.OL,
similar members
whichever is the lesser.
32.4.3 Design Shear Strength of Concrete
= the unsupported height of the wall.

= the horizontal distance between centres
The. design shear strength of concrete in walls.

"t". without shear reinforcement shall be taken as
below:
where
a) For B.1Lw51
of lateral restraint.
32.2.5 Design Axial Strength of Wall
"tow = (3.0 - B./ L.) K,
The design axial strength P,.per unitlength of a braced

wall in compression may be calculated from the
following equation:
where K, is 0.2 in limit stale method and 0.13

in working stress method.
b) For HJL. > I
p,. = 0.3 (t-1.2 e-2e,)):,

where
Lesser of the values calculated from (a)

abo~e and from
= thickness of the wall.
e = eccentricity of load measured at right
1:
angles to the pllllle of the wall determined

in accordance with 32.2.2. and
-K IT (Bw/£. +1 )
2 'l/hk (Bw/£. -I)
ow -
where K, is 0.045 in limit state method and

0.03 in working stress method, but sh~1I be
e" = additional eccentricity due to slendemess effect taken as B~/2 500 t.
not less than K,

32.3 Walls Subjected to Combined Horizontal
and VerticalForces
.p:; in any case, wh~re K
is 0.[5 in limit state method and 0.10 in

working stress method.
32.3.1 When horizontal forces are in the plane of the

wall, it may be designed for vertical forces in
accordance with 32.2 and for horizontal shear in
accordance with 32.3. In plane bending may be
neglected in case a horizonta1.cross-section ofthe wall
is always under compression due to combined effect
of horizontal and vertical loads.
32.4.4. Design of Shear Reinforcement

Shear reinforcement shan be provided to carry a shear
equal to V, - "t".1 (0.8 L.). In case of working stress
method V, is replaced by V. The strength of shear
reinforcement shall be calculated as per 40.4 or B-S.4
with A" defined as below:
32.3.2 Walls subjected to horizontal forces

perpendicular to the walllllld for which the design axial
load does not exceed 0.041;, A,. shall be designed as'
slabs in accordance with the. appropriate provisions
u~der 24. where A, is gross area of the section.
A" = p. (0.8 L.) t

where Pw is determined as follows:
a) For walls where HJ L."5, [. p. shaU be the
lesser of the ratios of either the vertical
32.4 Design for Horizontal Shear
reinforcement area or the horizontal'

reinforcement area to the cross-sectional area
32.4.1 Critical SectionforShear
of wall ill the respective direction.
The critical section for maximum shear shall be taken

at a distance from the base of 0.5 L. or 0.5 B.
whichever is les.s.
b) For walls where B.t L.> I. p. shall be the

ratio of Ibe horizontal reinforcement area 10
the cross-sectional area of wall per vertical
metre.
32.4.2 Nominal Shear Stress
The nominal shear stress 't"~ in walls shall be obtained . 32.5 Minimum
Requirements for Reinforcement
as follows:
. in Walls
't"~= V,/I.d
The reinforcement for.walls shall he proviljed as below:
62
IS 456: 2000
a) the minimum ratio of vertical reinforcement to
gross concrete area shall be:
1) 0.001 2 for deformed bars not larger than

16 mm in diameter and with a characteristic
strength of 415 N/mm' or greater.
2)0.001 5·for otber types of bars.
3) 0.001 2 for welded wire fabric not larger tlum
16 mm in diameter.
b) Vertical reinforcement shall be spaced not
farther apart than three times the wall thickness
nor 450 mm.
c) The minimum ratio of horizontal reinforcement
to gross concrete area shall be:
1) 0.002 0 for deformed bars not larger thaa
16 mm in diameter and with a characteristic
strength of 415 N/mm' or greater.
2) 0.0025 for other types of bars.
3) 0.002 0 for welded wire fabric not larger
than 16 mm in diameter.
d) Horizontal reinforcement shall.be spaced not
farther apart than three times the wall thickness
nor 450·mm.
NOTE - The minimum reinforcement ml\Y .not always be
sufficient to provide adequate resistance to the effects of
shrinkage and temperature.
32.S.1 For walls having thickness more than 200 mm,

the vertical and horizontal reinforcement shall
be provided in two grids, one near each face of the
wall.
be taken as the following horizontal distances:

a) Where supported at top and bottom risers by
beams spanning paranel with the risers, the
distance centre-to-centre of beams;
b) Where spaaning on to the edge of a landing slab,
which spans parallel, with the risers (see Fig.
17), a distance equal to the going of the stairs
plus at each end either half the width of the
landing or one metre, whichever is smaller; and
c) Where the landing slab s'pans in the same
direction as the stai.·s, they shall be considered
as acting together to form a single slab and the
span determinr,d as the distance centre-to-centre
of the supporting beams or walls, the going being
measured horizontally.
33.2 Distribution of Loading on Stairs
In the case of stairs with open wells, where spans partly
crossing at rigbt angles occur, the load on areas
common to any two such spans may be taken as 'onehalfin each direction as shown in
Fig. 18. Whereflight'
or landings are embedded into walls for a length of
not less than 110 nim and are designed to span in the
direction of the flight, a 150 JI1Rl strip may be deducted
from the.loaded 'lI'ea and the 'effective breadth of the
section increased by75 mm for purposes of design (see
Fig. 19).
.
33.3 Depth of Section

The depth of section shall be taken as the minimum
thickness perpendicular to the soffit of the siaircase.
32.S.2 Vertical reinforcement need .not be enclosed

by transverse reinforcement as given in 26.5.3.2 for
column, if the vertical reinforcement is not greater
thanO.O! times the gross sectional area or where the
vertical reinforcement is not required for
compression.
34 FOOTINGS
34.1 General
33.1 Effective Span of Stairs
Footings shall be designed to sustain the applied loads,

moments aad forces aa<;l the induced reactions and to
ensure that any settlement which may occur shall be
as nearly uniform as possible, and the safe bearing
capacity of the soil is not exceeded (see IS 1904).
The effective spaa \If stairs without striuger beams shall
34.1.1 In sloped or stepped footings the effective
33 STAIRS
I
I
11K
x
<1m
<1m
G+X+'t
<I m
>lm
G+X +1
>lm
<1m
G+Y·1
;>1 m >lm
6+1+1
UP
SPAN IN METRES
f-X+X+-- 1l0lNG (G) --l-v+v~

I'IG. 17 EFFECl1Vll SPAN FOR STAIRS,SUPPOR1'EP AT EACH END B'I'
LANDINGS SPANNING PARALLBL WITH THB l~JSERS
IS 456: 2000
mm
mm
w
~*,,-n mm
FIG. IS LOADING ON STAIRS WITH OPEN WELLS
FIG. 19 LOADING ON STAIRS

BUILT INTO WALLS '
cross-sectiouin compression shall be limited by the

area above the neu,tral plane, and the angle of slope or
depth and location of steps shall be such that the design
requirements are satisfied at every section. Sloped and
stepped footings that are designed as a unit shOJI be
constructed to-assul'e ~ction as a uni-t.
'where
q,; = calclllated maximum bearing pressnre at

the base of the pedestal in N/mm', and
j" = characteristic strength of concrete at
28 days in N/mm'.
'
;l,4.2
Moments
and Forces"']
. _ .
:.
-!}hlll
'
In reinforced anel plain'concrete footings, tije thickness" 34.2.lIn the case of
footings on piIes" computation
at the edge shall be not less than T50mm for footings J 'for moments and shears may
be bas~d' 'On the
on soils~ nor less .than 300 mm above the tops ofpiJ!'h r: ~ssumption that the
reaetlan !,r{Jm any' ,pile is
for footmgs on plIes.
' ,'. ,-·Mncentrated at the centre of the pIle.
'
34.1.2 Thick"essatthe Edge ojFooti"g
~Ji
34.1.3 ',In the case of plain concrete pedestals, the an!if&!; ~!34.2.2 For the
purpose of computing stresses in footings
between the planepassingthroughthe bottom edge of which support a round or
octagonalconcretecolumn or
the pedestal and the corresponding junction edge of pede.tit!; the face of the c6'!
umn or pedestal shall he
the column with peclestal and the horizontal plane ' takenas the side ofa square
inscribed within the
(see Fig., ZOrshall be goveflied by the expression:
perimeteroithe round oroctagonal colum!,or pedestal.
,
-;
-;~
I,OOq"
tan a 1:0;9 - +'I
.'
.J
, "
'
34.2.3.1 Thebending UlOment atany section shall be

detenninedby' passing through the ,section a vertical
/""
- COLUMN
PLAIN
CONeRE
PEDEST
/
/
I,
""
34.2.3 Bending Moment
'.
I
0(.
FIG. 20
64
IS 456: 2000
plane which extends completely across the footing, and
computing the moment of the forces acting over the
entire area of the footing on one side of the said plane.
34.2.3.2 The greatest bending moment to be used in
the design of an isolated concrete footing which
supports a column, pedestal or wal~, shall be the
momentcomputed in the manner prescnbed m 34.2.3.1
at sections located as follows:
a) At the face of the column, pedestal or wall, for
footings supporting a concrete column, pedestal
or wall;
b) Halfway between the centre-line and the edge
of the wall, for footings under masonry walls;
and
c) Halfway between the face of the column or
pedestal and the edge of the gussetted base, for
footings under gusBetted bases ..
34.3· Tensile Reinforcement

The total tensile reinforcement. at any sectionshall
provide a moment'of.'tesistatlce at least equal to the
bending moment on the section calculated in
accordance with 34.2.3.
34.3.1 Total tensile reinforcement shall be distributed
across the corresponding resisting section as given
below:
a) In one-way reinforced footing, the reinforcement
extending in each direction shall be distributed
uniformly across the full width of the footing;
b) In two-way reinforced square footing, the
reinforcement extending in each direction shall
be distributed uniformly across the full width
of the footing; and
.
c) In two-way reinforced rectangular footing, the
reinforcement in the long direction shall be
distributed uniformly across the full width of
the footing. For reinforcement in the short
direction, a central band equal to the width of
the footing shall be marked along the length of
the footing and portion of the reinforcement
determined in accordance with the equation
given below shall be uniformly distributed
across the central band:
34.2.4 Shear and Bond
34.2.4.1 The shear strength offootings is governed by

the more severe of the following two conditions:
a) The footing acting essentially as a wide beam,
with a potential diagonal crack extending in a
plane across the entire width; the critical section
for this condition shall be assumed as a vertical
section located from the face of the column,
pedestal or wall at a distance equal to the
effective depth of footing for footings on piles.
b) Two-way action of the footing, with potential
diagonal cracking along the surface of truncated
cone or pyramid around the concentrated load;
in this case, the footing shall be designed for
shear in accordance with appropriate provisions
specified in 31.6.
34.2.4.2 In computing the external shear or any section
through a footing supported on piles, the entire reaction
. from any pile of diameter D p whose centre is located
D 12 or more outside the section shall be assumed as
pioducing shear on the section; the reaction from any
pile whose centre is located D,I2 or more inside the
section shall be assumed as producing no shear on the
section. For intermediate positions of the pile centre,
the portion of the pile reaction to be assumed as
producing shear on the section shall be based on
straight line interpolation between full value at D,I2
outside the section and zero value at D,I2 inside the
section.
34.2.4.3 The critical section for checking the
development length in a footing shall be assumed at
the same planes as those described for bending moment
in 34.2.3 and also at all other vertical planes where
abrupt changes of section occur. If reinforcement is
curtailed, the anchorage requirements shall be checked
in accordance with 26.2.3.
Reinforcement in central band width

2
Total reinforcement in short direction "'. ~ + 1
where ~ is the ratio of the long side to the short
side of the footing. The remainder of the
reinforcement shail be uniformly di.tributed in
the outer portions of the footing.
34.4 Transfer of Load at the Base of Colnmn
The compressive stress in p.oncrete at the base of a
column or pedestal shall ~e considered as being
transferred by bearing to the top of the supporting
pedestal or footing. The bearing pressure on the loaded
area shall not exceed the permissible bearing stress in
direct compression multiplied by a value equal to
rx but not greater than 2;

f4;:
where
Al = supporting area for bearing of footing,

which in sloped or .stepped footing may
be taken as the area of the lower base of
the largest frustum of a pyramid or cone
contained wholly within the footing and
having for its upper base, the area actually
loaded and having side slope of one
vertical to two horizontal; and
A, = loaded area at the column base.
65
IS 456: 2000
diameter shall no exceed the diameter of the column
bars by more than 3 mm.
For working stress method of design the permissible

bearing stress on full area of concrete shall be taken as
0.25 Ie,; for limit state method of design the pennissible
bearing stress shan be 0.45 lek'
34.4.1 Where the permissible bearing stress on the
concrete in the supporting or supported member would
be exceeded, reinforcement shall be provided for
developing the excess force, either by extending the
longitudinal bars into the supporting member, or by
dowels (see 34.4.3).
34.4.4 Column bars of diameters larger than 36 mm,

in compression only can be dowelled at the footings
with bars of smaller size of the necessary area. The
dowel shan extend into the column, a distance equal
to the development length of the column bar and into
the footing, a distance equal to the development length
of the dowel.
34.5 Nominal Reinforcement
34.4.2 Where transfer of force is accomplished by

reinforcement, the development length of the
reinforcement shall be sufficient to transfer the
compression or tension to the supporting member in
accordance with 26.2.
34.5.1 Minimum reinforcement and spacing shall be

as per the requirements of solid slab.
34.5.2 The nominal reinforcement for concrete
sections of thickness greater than 1 m shall be
360 10m' per metre length in each direction on each
face. This provision does not supersede the requirement
of minimum tensile reinforcement based on the depth
of the section.
34.4.3 Extended longitudinal reinforcement or dowels

of at least 0.5 percent of the cross·sectional area of the
supported column or pedestal and a minimum offour
bars shall be provided. Where dowels are used, their
66
IS 456: 2000
SECTION 5 STRUCTURAL DESIGN (LIMIT STATE METHOD)

35 SAFETY AND SERVICEABILITY
REQUIREMENTS
35.1 General
In the method of design based on limit state concept,
the structure shall be designed to withstand safely all
loads liable to act on it throughout its life; it shall also
satisfy the serviceability requirements, such as
limitations on deflection and cracking. The acceptable
limit for the safety and serviceability requirements
before failure occurs is called a 'limit state'. The aim
of design is to achieve acceptable probabilities that
the structure will not become unfit for the use for which
it is intended, that is, that it will not reach a limit state.
35.1.1 All relevant limit states shall be considered in
design to ensure an adequate degree of safety and
serviceability. In general, the structure shall' be
designed on the basis of the most critical limit state
and shall be checked for other limit states.
35.1.2 For ensuring the above objective, the design
should be based on characteristic values for material
strengths and applied loads, which take into account
the variations in the material strengths and in the loads
to be supported. The characteristic values should be
based on statistical data if available; where such data
are not available they should be based on experience.
The 'design values' are derived from the characteristic
values through the use of partial safety factors, one
for material strengths and the other for loads. In the
absence of special considerations these factors should
have the values given in 36 according to the material,
the type of loading and the limit state being
considered.
35.2 Limit State of Collapse
The limit state of collapse of the structure or part of
the structure could be assessed from rupture of one or
more critical sections and from buckling due to elastic
or plastic instability (including the effects of sway
where appropriate) or overturning. The resistance to
bending, shear, torsion and axial loads at every section
shall not be less than the appropriate value at that
section produced by the probable most unfavourable
combination of loads on the structure using the
appropriate partial safety factors.
limits of cracking would vary with the type of structure

and environment. Where specific attention is required
to limit the designed crack width to a particular value,
crack width calculation may be done using formula
given in Annex F.
The practical objective of calculating crack width is
merely to give guidance to the designer in making
appropriate structural arrangements and in avoiding
gross errors in design, which might result in
concentration and excessive width of fl.exural crack.
The surface width of the cracks should not, in general,
exceed 0.3 mm in members where cracking is not
harmful and does not have any serious adverse effects
upon the preservation of reinforcing steel nor upon the
durability of the structures. In members where cracking
in the tensile zone is harmful either because they are
exposed to the effects of the weather or continuously
exposed to moisture or in contact soil or ground water,

an upper limit of 0.2 mm is suggested for the maximum
width of cracks. For particularly aggressive
environment, such as the 'severe' category in Table 3,
the assessed surface width of cracks should not in
general, exceed 0.1 mm.
35.4 Other Umit States
Structures designed for unusual or specialfu.nctions
shall comply with any relevant additionallirnit state
considered appropriate to that. structure.
36 CHARACTERISTIC AND DESIGN
VALUES AND PARTIAL SAFETY FACTORS
36.1 Cbaractelistic Strength of Materials
The term •characteristic strength' means that value of
the strength of the material below which not more than
5 percent of the test results ate expected to fall. The
characteristic strength for concrete shall be in
accordance with Table 2. Until the relevant Indian
Standard Specifications for reinforcing steel are
modified to include the concept of characteristic
strength, the characteristic value shall be assumed as
the minimum yield stress 10.2 percent proof stress
specified in the relevant Indian Standard Specifications.
36.2 Characteristic Loads
The term 'characteristic load' means that value of load
which has a 95 percent probability of not being exceeded
during the life of the structure. Since data are not
available tb express loads in statistical terms, for the
purpose of this standard, dead loads given in IS 875
(Part 1), imposed loads given in IS 875 (Part 2), wind
loads given in IS 875 (Part 3), snow load as given in
IS 875 (Pmt 4) and seismic forces given in IS 1893
shall be assumed as the characteristic loads.
35.3 Limit States of Serviceability
35.3.1 Deflection
Limiting values of deflections are given in 23.2.
35.3.2 Cracking
Cracking of concrete should not adversely affect the
appearance or durability of the structure; the acceptable
67
IS 456: 2000
36.4.2 Partial Safety Factor Ym for Mateiral
Strength
36.3 Design Values

36.3.1 Materials
36.4.2.1 When assessing the strength of a structure or

structural member for the limit state of collapse, the
values of partial safety factor, Ym should be taken as
1.5 for concrete and 1.15 for steel.
The design strength of the materials,J; is given by
where
NOTE - 'Y,n values are ruready incorporated_ in the

equations and tables given in this standard for limit state
= characteristic strength of the material
design.
(see 36.1), and
36.4.2.2 When assessing the deflection, the material

properties such as modulus of elasticity should be
taken as those associated with the characteristic
strength of the material.
Ym = partial safety factor appropriate to the

material and the limit state being
considered.
36.3.2 Loads
37 ANALYSIS
The design load, F, is given by
37.1 Analysis of Structure
Ed =Fyf
Methods of analysis as in 22 shall be used. The

material strength to be assumed shall be characteristic
values in the detennination of elastic properties of
members irrespective of the limit state being
considered. Redistribution of the calculated moments
may be made as given in 37.1.1.
where
F = characteristic load (see 36.2), and
Yf = partial safety factor appropriate to the

nature ofloading and the limit state being
consi4ered.
37.1.1. Redistribution of Moments in Continuous
Beams and Frames
36.3.3 Consequences .ofAttaining Limit State
The redistribution of moments may be carried out

satisfying the following condi.tions:
Where the consequences of a structure attaining a limit

state are of a serious nature such as huge loss of life
and disruption of the economy, higher values for Yf
a) Equilibirum between the interal forces and the

external loads is maintained.
and Ym than those given under 36.4.1 and 36.4.2 may

be applied.
36.4.1 Partial Scifety Factor Yf for Loads
b) The ultimate moment of resistance provided at

any section of a member is not less than 70
percent of the moment at that section obtained
from an elastic maximum moment diagram
covering all appropriate combinations ofloads.
The values of Yf given in Table 18 shalI normally be

used.
c) The elastic moment at any section in a member

due to a pmticular c'.'rubination of loads shall
36.4 Partial Safety Factors
Table 18 Values of Partial Safety Factor Yf for Loads

(Clauses 18.2.3.1,36.4.1 and B-4.3)
Load Combination
(I)
Limit State of Collapse

DL
IL
WL
DL
IL
WL
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
1.0
1.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
].0
0.8
1.5
DL+IL
DL+WL
Limit States of
Serviceability
1.5 or
1.0
9. 91)
DL+1L+ WL
1.2
0.8
NOlES
While considering earthquake effects, substitute EL for WL.
For the limit states of serviceability, the values of 1f given in this table are
appJicable for short term effects. While assessing the
long term effects due to creep the dead load and that part of the live load likely
to be pennanerit may only be considered.
I) This value is to be considered when stability against overturning or stress
reversal is critical.
68
IS 456: 2000
b) The maximum strain in concrete at the
outermost compression fibre is taken as 0.003 5
in bending.
not be reduced by more than 30 percent of the

numerically largest moment given anywhere by
the elastic maximum moments diagram for the
particular member, covering all appropriate
combination of loads.
d) At sections where the moment capacity after
redistribution is less than that from the elastic
maximum moment diagram, the following
relationship shall be satisfied:
c) The relationship between the compressive stress

distribution in concrete and the strain in concrete
may be assumed to be rectangle, trapezoid,
parabola or any other shape which results in
prediction of strength in substantial agreement
with the results of test. An acceptable stressstrain curve is given in Fig. 21. For
design
purposes, the compressive strength of concrete
in the structure shaIl be assumed to be 0.67 times
the characteristic strength. The partial safety
factor Ym = 1.5 shall be applied in addition to
this.
:51.+ liM ,,0.6

diDO
where
= depth of neutral axis,

d = effective depth, and
oM = percentage reduction in moment.
e) In structures in which the structural frame
provides the lateral stability, the reductions in
moment allowed by condition 37.1.1 (c) shall
be restricted to 10 percent for structures over 4
storeys in height.
x,
Nom - For the stress-strain curve in Fig. 21 the design
stress block parameters are as follows (see Fig. 22):

Area of stress block
Depth of centre of compressive force
= 0.42 Xu
from the extreme fibre in compression
where
fd '= characteristic compressive strength of concrete, and
Xu = depth of neutral axis.
37.1.2 Analysis of Slabs Spanning in Tho Directions

at Right Angles
d) The tensile strength of the concrete is ignored.
e) The stresses in the reinforcement are derived
from representative stress-strain curve for the
type of steel used. Typical curves are given in
Fig. 23. For design purposes the partial safety
factor Ym ' equal to 1.15 shall be applied.
Yield line theory or any other acceptable method

may be used. Alternatively the provisions given in
Annex D may be foIl owed.
38 LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE: FLEXURE
38.1 Assnmptions
Design for the limit state of collapse in flexure shall
be based on the assumptions given below:
a) Plane sections normal to the axis remain plane
after bending.
/) The maximum strain in the tension reinforcement in the section at failure shall:
not be
less than:
~+0.OO2
l.15E,
where
PARABOLIC
CURVE
I, = characteristic strength of steel, and
__4-------------~lck
E, = modulus of elasticity of steel.
O'67fck
V>
V>
UI
'"
O. 67
V>
0·002
h!Ym
O·42Xu
Xu
0·0035
STRAIN_
FIG. 22 STRESS BLOCK PARAMETERS
FIG. 21 STRESS-STRAIN CURVE FOR CONCRETE
69
O.36fck )(u
IS 456: 2000
f,
0.975'.1 - - - - - - --.,,...,...-----Iy
0·95'1
0·901y
85fy
0'801y
v-t------ Iy /11/5
,
I
I
I
I
STRESS
I
I
I
I
E s .200000 N/m1n2
I
I
'004
·0001
·003
'OOOl
-0007
STRAIN-
23A Cold Worked Deformed Bar
,-----'-----,y
Iy
J,.--------fy/1.1S
t
O~----------------
STRAIIII-
23B STEEL BAR WITH DEFINITE Y,ELD POIIIIT

FlG. 23 REPRESENTATIVE STRESS-STRAIN CURVES FOR REINFORCEMENT
38.1 (e) for flexure, the following shall be assumed:
NOTE - The limiting values of the depth of neutral axis for

different grades of steel based 011 the assumptions in 38.1 afe as
a) The maximum compressive sttain in concrete

in axial compression is takim as 0.002.
follows:
.I;
x",m~./d
250
0.53
0.48
415
500
b) The maximum compressive strain at the highly

compressed extreme fibre in concrete subjected
to axial compression and bending and when
there is no tension on the section shall be 0.0035
minus 0.75 times the strain at the least
compressed extreme fibre.
0.46
The expression for obtaining the moments of resistance for
rectangular and T~Sections. based all the assumptions of 38.1, are

given in Annex G.
39 LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE:

COMPRESSION
39.2 Minimum Eccentricity
39.1 Assumptions
In addition to the assumptions given in 38.1 (a) to
All members in compression shan be designed for the

minimum eccentricity in accordance with25.4. Where
70
IS 456: 2000
calculated eccentricity is larger, the minimum
eccentricity should be ignored.
39.3 Short Axially Loaded Members in
Compression
The member shall be designed by considering the
assumptions given in 39.1 and the minimum
eccentricity. When the minimum eccentricity as
per 25.4 does not exceed 0.05 times the lateral
dimension, the memhers may be designed by the
following equation:
Po = 0.4 10k .A, + 0.67 f, .A"
39.6 Members Snbjected to Combined Axial Load

and Biaxial Bending
The resistance of a member subjected to axial force
and biaxial bending shall be obtained on the basis of
assumptions given in 39.1 and 39.2 with neutral axis
so chosen as to satisfy the eqUilibrium of load and
moments about two axes. Alternatively such members
may be designed by the following equation:
Mux
[ Mud
]a, + [ Muy ]'" : :; I 0

M uyt
where
where
= moments about x and y axes
Po = axi.lload on the member,
due to design loads,
f.'k = characteristic compressive strength of the
= maximum uniaxial moment

capacity for an axial load of P"
bending about x and y axes
respectively, and
concrete,
Ac = Area of concrete,
f,
= characteristic strength of the compression

reinforcement, and
= area of longitudinal reinforcement for

columns.
39.4 Compression Members with Helical
Reinforcement
i
I
The strenglh of compression members with helical

reinforcement satisfying the requirement of39.4.1 shall
be taken as 1.05 times the strength of similar member
with lateral ties.
39.4.1 The ratio of the volume of helical reinforcement
to the volume of the core shall not be less than
0.36 (AIA,-I)f.,/f,
where
Ag = gross area of the section,
. A, = area ofthecore of the helically reinforced
lX, is related to PiP"
where P", = 0.45 f", . A, + 0.75 f y ' A"

For values of PiP" = 0.2 to 0,8, the values of lx" vary
linearly from 1.0 to 2.0. For values less than 0.2, lX, is
1.0; for values greater than 0.8, lX, is 2.0.
39.7 Slender Compression Members
The design of slender compressipn members
(see 25.1.1) shall be based on the forces and the
momentS determined from an analysis of the.strt)cture,
including the effect of deflections on momepts and
forces. When the effect of deflections are' not taken
into account in the analysis, additional moment given
in 39.7.1 shall be taken into account in the appropriate
direction.
39.7.1 The additional moments M~ and M,y shall be
calculated by the following formulae:
column measured to the outside diameter

of the helix,
M = PuD
ax
2000
.{lex}2
D
10k = characteristic compressive strength of the

concrete, and
f, = characteristic strength of the helical
reinforcement but not exceeding

415 N/mm'.
where
39.5 Members Snbjected to Combined Axial

Load and Uniaxial Bending
P,
= axial load on the member,
l~
= effective length in respect of the major

axis,
I"
A member subjected to axial force and uniaxial bending

shall be designed on the basis of 39.1 and 39.2.
= effective length in respect of the ruinor axis,
D = depth of the cross-section at right angles

to the major axis, and
NOTE- The design of member subject to combined axial load

and uniaxial bending
involve lengthy calculation by trial
wm
and error. In order to overcome these difficulties interaction
diagrams may be used. These have been prepared and published

by BIS in 'SP : 16 Design aids· for reinforced concrete to
= width of ttie member.
For design of section, 39.5 or 39.6 as appropriate shall

apply.
IS 456'.
71
IS 456: 2000
NOTES
of the beam.
1 A column may be considered braced in a given plane iflateral

stability to the structure as a whole is provided by walls or
The negative sign in the fonnula applies when the

bending moment M" increases numerically in the same
direction as the effective depth d increases, and the
positive sign when the moment decreases numerically
in this direction.
bracing or buttressing designed to resist all lateral forces in
that plane. It should otherwise be Considered as unbraced.

2 In the case of a braced cohimn without any transverse loads
occurring in its height, the addidonal moment shall be added
tO,an initial moment equal to sum of 0.4 Mul and 0.6 Mu2
where M1I2 is the larger end moment nnd MUI is the smaller
end moment (assumed negative if the column is bent in double
40.2 Design Shear Strength of Concrete
curvature). In no case shaH the initial moment be less than
40.2.1 The design shear strength of concrete in beams

without shear reinforcement is given in Table 19.
0.4 MU2 nor the total moment including the initial moment be
less than M.,r For unbraced columns. the additional moment
shall be added to the end moments.
40.2.1.1 For solid slabs, the design shear strength for

concrete shall be 7:,k, where k has the values given
below:
3 Unbraced compression members. at any given level or storey.

subject to lateral load are usually constrained to deflect
equally. In such cases slenderness ratio for each column may
be taken as the avemge for all columns acting in the same
direction.
Overal/Depth 3000r 275 250 225.200 175 150 or

ofSlab,mm more
less
k
1.00 1.05 UO U5 1.20 1.25 1.30
39.7.1.1 The values given by equation 39.7.1 may be

multiplied by the following factor:
Nom - This provision shall not apply to flat slabs for which
31.6 shall apply.
k=P.,,-P" :;;1
40.2.2 Shear Strength of Members under Axial

Compression
~z-It
where
For members subjected to axial compression P", the

design shear strength of concrete, given in Table 19,
shall be multiplied by the following factor:
= axial load- on compression member,

P = as defined in 39.6, and
Ph = axial load corresponding to the condition
P
"
U1.
of maximum compressive strain of

0.003 5 in concrete and tensile strain of
0.002 in outer most layer oftension steel.
0=1+
3p"
Agfck
but'not exceeding 1.5
where
40.1 Nominal Shear Stress
P = axial compressive force in Newtons,

"
A = gross area of the concrete sectio.~l in mm2,
and
The nontinal shear stress in beams of unifetm depth

shall be obtained by the following equation:
10k = characteristic compressive strc;ngth of
40 LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE: SHEAR
concrete.
40.2.3 With Shear Reinforcement

Under no circumstances, even with shear
reinforcement, shall the nominal shear stress iri beams
'tv exeeed- 't cmax given in Table 20.
where
V" = shear force due to design loads;

b = breadth of the member, which for flanged
40.2.3.1 For solid slabs, the nominal shear stress

shall not exceed half the appropriate values given in
Table 20.
section shall be taken as the breadth of

the web, bw; and
= effective depth.
40.3 Minimum Shear Reinforcement
40.1.1 Beams of Varying Depth
When ~, is less than ~c given in Table 19, minimum

shear reinforcement shall be provided in accordance
with 26.5.1.6.
In the case of beams of varying depth the equation

shall be modified as:
40.4 Design of Shear Reinforcement

When Tv exceeds Tc given in Table 19, shear
reinforcement shall be provided in any of the following
fonns:
.where
~" V"' band d are the same as in 40.1,
a) Vertical stirrups,
M" =bending moment at the section, and
b) Bent-up bars along with stirrups, and
~ = angle between the top and the bottom edges
72
IS 456: 2000
Table 19 Design Shear Strength of Concrete, "" N/mm'
(Clauses 40.2.1, 40.2.2. 40.3, 40.4, 40.5.3, 41.3.2, 41.3.3 and 41.4.3)
1.0~
Concrete Grade
bd
(I)
M 15
M20
M25
M30
M35
M 40 and above
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
$0.15
0.28
0.28
0.29
0.29
0.29
0.30
0.25
0.35
0.36
0.36
0.37
0.3'7
0.38
0.50
0.46
0.48
0.49
0.50
0.50
0.51
0.75
0.54
0.56
0.57
0.59
0.59
0.60
1.00
0.60
0.62
0.64
0.66
0.67
0.68
1.25
0.64
0.67
0.70
0:71
0.73
0.74
1.50
0.68
0.72
0.74
0.76
0.78
0.79
1.75
0.71
0.75
0.78
0.80
0.82
0.84
2.00
0.71
0.79
0.82
0.84
0.86
0.88
2.25
0.71
0.81
0.85
0.88
0.90
0.92
2.50
0.71
0.82
0.88
0.91
0.93
0.95
2.75
0.71
0.82
0.90
0.94
0.96
0.98
3.00 .
arid
above
0.71
0.82
0.92
0.96
0.99
1.01.
NOTE - The term A. is the area of longitudinal tension reinforcement which

continues at least one effective depth beyond the section
being considered except at support where the full area of tension reinforcement may
be used provided the detailing conforms to 26.2.2
and 26.2.3
Table 20 Maximnm Shear Stress, r, max' N/mm'

(Clauses 40.2.3, 40.2.3.1, 40.5.1 and 41.3.1 )
Concrete
Grade
M 15
M20
M25
M39
M35
2.5
2.8
3.1
3.5
3.7
M40
and
above
V" =0.87.t; A" sin a
c) Inclined stirrups.
Where bent-up bars are provided, their contribution
towards shear resistance shall not be more than half
that of the total shear reinforcement.
where
Shear reinforcement shaH be provided to carry a shear

equal to Vu - "" bd The strength of shear reinforcement V shall be calculated as
below:
A" =
U~
a) For vertical stirrups:

0. 87 / y A.v d
Vu,
us
total cross-sectional area of stirrup legs

or bent-up bars
within a distance s .
.
..
= spacing of the stirrups or bent-up bars
tv
t,
= design shear strength of the concrete,
= breadth of the member which for
along the length of the member;
nominal shear stress,
flanged beams, shall be taken as the

breadth of the web bw'
b) For inclined stirrups or a series of bars bent-up

at different cross-sections:
V =
4.0
I,
= characteristic strength of the stirrup or

bent-up reinforcement which shall not
be taken greater than 415 N/mm2,
0.8.7/y A"d ( .
)
sma+cosa
Sv
= angle between the inclined stirrup or

. bent- up bar and the axis of the member,
not less than 45° , and
c) For single bar or single group of paraHel bars,

all bent-up at the sarne cross-section:
73
=
effective depth.
IS 456: 2000
NOTES
is given by:
1 Where more than one type of shear reinforcement is used

to reinforce the same portion of the beam. the total shear
resistance shall be computed as the sum of the resistance
for the various types separately.
2 The area of the stirrups shall not be less than the minimum
specified in 26.5.1.6.
A, =avb (1'v - 2d ",Ia v) 10.87.fy <: O.4avb10.87 J' y

This reinforcement should he provided within the middle
three quarters of av' where a is less than d, horizontal
shear reinforcement will be ;ffective than vertical.
40.5 Enhanced Shear Strength of Sections Close

to Snpports
40.5.3 Enhanced Shear Strength Near Supports

(Simplified Approach)
40.5.1 General
The procedure given in 40.S.1 and 40.5.2 may be used

for all beams. However for beams carrying generally
uniform load or where the principal load is located
farther than 2d from the face of support, the shear
stress may be calculated at a section a distance d from
the face of support. The value
of l'v is calculated in
,
accordance with Table 19 and appropriate shear
reinforcement is provided at sections closer to the
support, no further check for shear at such sections is
required,
Shear failure at sections of beams and cantilevers

without shear reinforcement will normally occur on
plane inclined at an angle 30° to the horizontal. If the
angle of failure plane is forced to be inclined more
steeply than this [because the section considered
(X - X) in Fig. 24 is close to a support or for other
reasons1, the shear force required to produce failure is
increased.
The enhancement of shear strength may be taken
into account in the design of sections near a support
by increasing design shear strength of concrete to
2d 7:, I a v provided that design shear stress at the face
of the support remains less than the values given in
Thble 20. Account may be taken of the enhancement
in any situation where the section considered is closer
to the face of a support or concentrated load than twice
the effective depth, d. To be effective, tension
reinforcement should extend on each side of the point
where it is intersected by a possible failure plane for a
distance at least equal to the effective depth, or be
provided with an equivalent anchorage.
40.5.2 Shear Reinforcement for Sections Close to

Supports
If shear reinforcement is required, the total area of this
41 LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE: TORSION

41,1 General
In structures, where torsion is required to maintain
equilibrium, members shall be designed for torsion in
accordance with 41.2, 41.3 and 41.4. However, for such
indeterminate structures where torsion can be eliminated
by releasing redundant restrainis, no specific design for
torsion is necessary, provided torsional stiffriess is
neglected in the calculation of internal forces. Adequate
control of any tOJ~ional cracking is provided by the shear
'
reinforcement as per 40.
Nom - The approach to desIgn in this clause is ru; follows:

Torsional reinforcement is not calculated separaieiy from that
required for bending and shear. Instead the totaJ longitudinaJ
reinforcement is detennined for a fictitious bending moment
which is a function of aetua] bending moment and torsion;
x
NOTE - The shear causing failure is that acting on section
FIG. 24 SHEAR FAILURE NEAR SUPPORTS
74
x-x.
. IS 456 : 2000
similarly web reinforcement is determined for a fictitious shear
which is a function of actual shear and torsion,
where
r;,
is the torsional moment, D is the overall depth

of the beam and b is the breadth of the beam.
41.1.1 The design rules laid down in 41.3 and 41.4

shall apply to beams of solid rectangular cross-section.
However, these clauses may also be applied to flanged
beams, by substituting b. for b in which case they are
generally conservative; therefore specialist literatnre
may be referred to.
41.4.2.1 If the numerical value of M as defined

in 41.4.2 exceeds the numerical value of the moment
M", longitudinal reinforcement shall be provided on
the flexural compression face, such that the beam
can also withstand an equivalent Me2 given by
41.2 Critical Section
Me2 = M, - Mu , the momeQt Mol being taken as acting

in the opposite sense to the moment M
Sections located less than a distance d, from the face

of the support may be designed for the same torsion as
computed at a distance d, where d is the effective depth.
,,'
41.4.3 Transverse Reinforcement
Two legged closed hoops enclosing the corner

longitudinal bars shall have an area of cross-section
A", given by
41.3 Shear and Torsion

41.3.1 Equivalent Shear
Equivalent shear, V" shall be calculated from the

formula:
Asv =
Tusv
b1 d 1 (0.87 fy)
Vu Sy
2.5d1 (0.87 fy)'
but the total transverse reinforcement shall not be less
than
Ve =Vu +1.6;
where
(t've-'t"c)b.sv
0.87 fy
V, = equivalent shear,
V" = shear,
where
T = torsional moment, and

"
b = breadth of beam.
The equivalent nominal shear stress, 't in this case

" except for
shall be calculated as given in 40.1,
substituting V" by V;. The values of~" shall not exceed
the values of~, mo.' given in Table 20.
s, = spacing of the stirrup reinforcement,

bl
dl
= breadth of the member,
f , = characteristic 'strength of the stirrup

reinforcement, .
41.4 Reinforcement in Members Snbjected to
~" = equivalent shear stress as specified in

41.3.1, and
.
Torsion
41.4.1 Reinforcement for torsion, when required, shall
consist of longitudinal and transverse reinforcement.
~,
= shear strength of the concrete as per Table

19.
41.4.2 Longitudinal Reinforcement
42 LIMIT STATE OF SERVICEABILITY:

DEFLECTION
The longitudinal reinforcement shall be designed to
resist an equivalent bending moment, Mel' given by
42.1 Flexural Members
Mel=Mu+Ml
In all norroal cases, the deflection of a flexural member

will not be excessive if the ratio of its span to its
effective depth is not greater than appropriate ratios
given in 23.2.1. When deflections are calculated
according to Annex C, they shall not exceed the
perroissible values given iil.23.2.
where
Mu = bending moment at the cross-section, and

u
= centre-to-centre distance between corner

bars,
41.3.3 If ~ exceeds ~ given in Table 19, both

"
,
longitudinal and transverse reinforcement shall be
provided in accordance with 41.4.
= r
= centre-to-centre distance between corner

bars in the direction of the width,
41.3.2 If the equivalent nominal shear stress, ~ does

not exceed 't c given in Table 19, minimum"shear
reinforcement shall be provided as per 26.5.1.6.
M,
= torsional moment,
"
V" = shear force,
(I+Dlb)
1.7
75
IS 456: 2000
43 LIMIT STATE OF SERVICEABILITY:
CRACKING
43.2 Compression Members

Cracks due to bending in a compression member
subjected to a design axial load greater than 0.210, A"
where!" is the characteristic compressive strength of
concrete and A, is the area of the gross section of the
member, need not be checked. A member subjected to
lesser load than 0.2!", A, may be considered
as flexural member for the purpose of crack control
(see 43.1).
43.1 Flexural Members

In general, compliance with the spacing requirements
of' reinforcement given in 26.3.2 should be sufficient
to control flexural cracking. If greater spacing are
required, the expected crack width should be checked
by formula given in Annex F.
Civil Junction
76
IS 456: 2000
ANNEXA
(Clause 2)
LIST OF REFERRED INDIAN STANDARDS
Title
IS No.
269: 1989
IS No.
Specification for ordinary

POltland cement, 33 grade (fourth
1642: 1989
Code of practice for fire safety

of buildings (general) : Details of
construction (first revision)
1786: 1985
Specification for high strength

deformed steel bars and wires for
concrete reinforcement (third
revision)
1791 : 1968
Specification· for batch type

concrete mixers (second revision)
1893: 1984
Criteria for earthquake resistant

design of structures (fourth
revision)
383: 1970
Specification for coarse and fine

aggregates from natural sources
for concrete (second revision)
432 (Part I) :
1982
Specification for mild steel and

medium tensile steel bars and
hard-drawn steel wire for
concrete reinforcement: Part I
Mild steel and medium tensile
steel bars (third revision)
455: 1989
Title
revision)
Specification for Portland slag

cement (fourth revision)
1904: 1986
Code of practice for design and

construction of foundations in
soils : General requirements
(third revision)
2062: 1992
Steel for general structural

purposes (fourth revision):
2386 (Part 3) :
1963
Methods of test for aggregates for

concrete f Part 3 Specific gravity,
density, voids, absorption and
bulking
2502: 1963
Code of practice for bending and

fixing of bars for concrete
reinforcement
516: 1959
Method of test for strength of

concrete
875
Code of practice for design loads

(other than earthquake) for
buildings and structures:
(Part 1) : 1987
Dead loads - Unit weights of

building material and stored
materials (second revision)
(Part 2) : 1987
Imposed loads (second revision)
(Part 3) : 1987
Wind loads (second revi,ion)
(Part 4) : 1987
Snow loads (second revision)
(part 5) : 1987
Special loads and load

combinations (second revision)
2505: 1980
Concrete vibrators -Immersion

type - .General requirements
1199: 1959
Methods of sampling and

analysis of concrete
2506: 1985
1343: 1980
Code of practice for prestressed

concrete (first revision)
General requirements for screed

board concrete vibrators (first
revision)
2514: 1963
Specification for Portland

pozzolana cement:
Specification for concrete

vibrating tables
2751: 1979
Recommended practice for

welding of mild steel plain and
deformed bars for reinforced
construction (first revision)
revision)
3025
1566: 1982
Specification for hard-drawn

steel wire fabric for concrete
reinforcement (second revision)
Methods of sampling and test

(physical and chemical) for water
and waste water:
(Part 17) : 1984
1641: 1988
Code of practice for fire safety

of buildings (general): General
principles of fire grading and
classification (first revision)
Non-filterable residue (total

suspended solids) (first revision)
(Part 18) : 1984
Volatile and fixed residue (total

filterable and non-filterable) (first
revi.rion)
1489
(Part I) : 1991
Fly ash based (third revision)
(Part 2) : 1991
Calcined clay based (third
77
IS 456: 2000
IS No.
TItle
IS No.
Title
(Part 22) : 1986
Acidity (first revision)
(Part 3) : 1972
Concrete reinforcement
(Part 23) : 1986
Alkalinity (first revision)
(Part 4) : 1972
Types of concrete
(Part 24) : 1986
Sulphates (first revision)
(Part 5) : 1972
Formwork for concrete
(Part 32) : 1988
Chloride (first revision)
(Part 6) : 1972
Equipment. tool and plant
3414: 1968
Code of practice for design and

installation of joints in buildings
(Part 7) : 1973
3812: 1981
Specification for fly ash for use

as pozzolan. and admixture (first
revision) .
Mixing, laying, compaction,

curing and other construction
aspect
(Part 8) : 1973
Properties of cOllcrete
(Part 9) : 1973
Structural aspects
3951 (Part I) :
1975
Specification for hollow clay tiles

for floors and roofs: Part 1 Filler
type (first revision)
(Part 10) : 1973
Tests and testing apparatus
(Part 11) : 1973
Prestressed concrete
4031 (part 5):

1988
Methods of physical tests for

hydraulic cement : Part 5
Determination of initial and final
setting times (first revision)
(Part 12) : 1973
Miscellaneous
4082: 1996
4326: 1993
4656: 1968
4845: 1968
Code of practice for extreme

weather concreting:
(Part 1): 1975
Recommended practice for hot

weather concreting
(part 2) : 1975
Recommended practice for cold

weather concreting
8041: 1990
Specification for form vibrators
for concrete
Specification for rapid hardening

Portland cement (second revision)
8043: 1991
Definitions and terminology

relating to hydraulic cement
Specification for hydrophobic

Portland cement (second Il'vision)
8112: 1989
Specificaiion for 43 grade

ordinary Portland cement (first
revision)
9013 : 1978
Method of making. curing

and determining compressive
strengih of accelerated cured
concrete t'est specimens
9103: 1999
Specification for admixtures for

concrete (first revision)
9417: 1989
Recommendations for welding

cold worked bars for reinforced
concrete construction (first
revision)
lI817 : 1986
Classification of joints in
buildings for accommodation of
dimensional deviations during
construction
12089: 1987
Specification for granulated slag

for manufacture of Portland slag
cement
12119 : 1987
General requirements for pan

mixers for concrete
4926: 1976
Specification for ready-mixed
concrete (second revision)
5816 : 1999
Method of test for splitting

tensile strength of concrete
(first revision)
Code of practice for construction
of floor and roof with joists and
filler blocks:
(Part 1) : 1971
With hollow concrete filler

blocks
(Part 2) : 1971
With hollow clay filler blocks

(first revision)
6461
7861
Code of practice for earthquake

resistant design and construction
of buildings (second revision)
Specification for concrete

batching and mixing plant
6452: 1989
Specification for supersulphated

cement
Recommendations on stacking
and storage of construction
materials and components at site
(second revision)
4925: 1968
6061
6909: 1990
Specification for high alumina

cement for structural use
Glossary of terms relating to
cement:
(Part 1) : 1972
Concrete aggregates
(Part 2) : 1972
Materials
78
IS 456: 200Q
IS No.
Title
IS No.
Title
12269: 1987
Specification for 53 grade

ordinary Portland cement
(Part 1) : 1992
Ultrasonic pulse velocity
(Part 2) : 1992
Rebound hammer
12330: 1988
Specification for sulphate

resisting Portland cement
13920: 1993
12600: 1989
Specification for low heat

Portland cement
Code of practice for ductile

detailing of reinforced concrete
structures subjected to seesmic
forces
13311
Methods of non-destructive
testing of concrete:
14687: 1999
Guidelines for falsework for

concrete structures
79
IS 456: 2000
ANNEX B
(Clauses 18.2.2,22.3.1,22.7,26.2.1 ami 32.1)
STRUCTURAL DESIGN (WORKING STRESS METHOD)

B-1 GENERAL
c) The stress-strain relationship of steel and

concrete, under working loads, is a straight line.
B-1.1 General Design Reqnirements
d) The modular ratio m has the value 280

30',bo
where <7dID is permissible compressive stress due
10 bending in concrete in Nlmm' as specified in
Table 21.
The general design requirements of Section 3 shall

apply to this Annex.
B-1.2 Redistribntion of Moments
Except where the simplified analysis using coefficients
. (see 22.S) is used, the moments over the supports for
any assumed arrangement of loading, including the
dead load moments may each he increased or decreased
by not more than 15 percent, provided that thes.
modified moments over the supports are used for the
calculation of the corresponding moments in the spans.
NOTE - The expression given for m partially takes into

account long-term effects such as creep. Therefore this m
is not the srune as the modular ratio derived based on the
value of Ec given in 6.2.3.1.
B-2 PF.RMISSIBLE STRESSES
8-2.1 Permissible Stresses in Concrete

Pennissible stresses for the various grades of concrete
shall be taken as those given in Tables 21 and 23.
B-1.3 Assumptio.... for Design of Members

In the methods based on elastic theory, the following
assumptions shall be made:
NOTE - For increase in strength with age 6.2.1 shall be

applicable. The values ofperniissible stress shall be obtained by
interpolation between the grodes of concrete.
a) At any cross-section, plane sections before

bending remain plain after bending.
B-2.1.1 Direct Tension
b) All tensile stresses are taken up by reinforcement

Rod none by concrete, except as otherwise
specIfically permitted.
For members in direct tension, when full tension is

taken by the reinforcement alone, the tensile stress shall
be not greater than the values given below:
Grade of
Concrete
M 10
MI5
M20
M25
M30
M35
M40 .
M4S
M50
Tensile Stre.~s,
1.2
2.0
2.8
3.2
3.6
4.0
4.4
4.8
5.2
NImm'
B-2.2 Permissible Stresses in Steel Reinforcement
F,
The tensile stress shall be calculated as A + m A.,
Permissible stresses in steel reinforcement shall not

exceed the values specified in Table 22.
"
where
8-2.2.1 In flexural members the value of <7" given in

Table 22 is applicable at the centroid of the tensile
reinforcement subject to the condition. that when more
than one layer of tensile reinforcement is provided,
the stress at the centroid of the outermost layer shall
not exceed by more than 10 percent the value given in
Table 22.
F, = total tension on the member minus pre-
tension in steel, if any, before concreting~

A, = cross-sectional area of concrete excluding
any finishing material and reinforcing
steel;
m = modular ratio; and
8-2.3 Increa.~ in Permissible Stress.s
A" = cross-sectional area of reinforcing steel

in tension.
B-2.1.2 Bond Stress for Deformed Bars
Where stresses due to wind (or earthquake) temperature

and shrinkage effects are combined with those due to
dead, live and impact load, the stresses specified in
Tables 21, 22 and·23 may he exceeded upto a limit of
In the case of deformed bars conforming to IS 1786,

the bond stresses given in Table 21 may be increased
by 60 percent.
1 percent. Wind and seismic forces need not be

333
considered as acting simultaneously.
80
Table 21 Permissible Stresses In Concrete
(Clauses B-1.3, B-2.1, B-2. 1.2, B-2.3 andB-4.2)
IS 456: 2000
All values in N/mm2•
Bending
Direct
Permissible Stress
in Bond (Average) for
Plain Bars in Tension
(2)
(3)
(4)
Permissible Stress in Compression
Grade ;;;
Concre£e
(I)
MIO
MIS
M20
M25
M30
M35
M40
M45
Gob"
<1~
3.0
2.5
5.0
4.0
0.6
7.0
5.0
O.S
8.5
6.0
0.9
10.0
8.0
1.0
!l.5
9.0
1.1
13.0
10.0
1.2
14.5
11.0
1.3
1.6.0
12.0
1.4
M50
~~~alues of pennissible shear stress in concrete are'~:iven in Table 23.
--
2 '1'l1-e bond stress given in col 4 shall be increased by 25 percent for bars in
compression.
B-3 l"ERMISSmLE LOADS IN COMPRESSION

MEtvl BERS
~ Pedestals and Short Colnmns with Lateral
B-3 ."
TieS
The ""ial load P pe~issibl~ on a pedestal or short
1 t'ln reinforced WIth longItudInal bars and. lateral
c.o u shall not exceed that given by the following
multiplication of the appropriate maximum pennissible

stress as specified under B-2.1 and B-2.2 by the
coefficient C, given by the following formula:
C = 1.25 _..!SL
,
48 b
where
Cr = reduction coefficient;
tieS
equation:
10 , = effective length of column; and

b
pennissible stress in concrete in direct
C~Pressiont
cross~sectional
the diameter of the core.

For more exact calculations, the maximum pennissible .
stresses in a reinforced concrete column or part thereof
having a ratio of effective column length to least lateral
radius of gyration above 4Q shall not exceed those
which result from the multiplication of the appropriate
maximum. pennissible stresses specified uilder B-2.1
and B-2.2 by the coefficient C, given by the following
fonnula:
area of concrete
excluding any finishing material and

reinforcing steel,
(J
"
'" least lateral dimension of column; for

column with helical reinforcement, b is
= permissible compressive stress for

column bars,and
cross-sectional area of the longitudinal
steel.
NOTE - The' minimum eccentricity mentioned in 25.4 may be

deemed to be incorporated in the above equation.
C = 1.25 _
lof
,
160 i.u.
B-3. 2 Short Columns with Helical Reinforcement
where i,m. is the least radius of gyration.
rh e permissible load for columns with helical

'uforcement satisfying the requirement of39.4.1 shall
~~ 1.05 times the pe~missible load for similarmember
with lateral ties or flngs..
'.
B-3.4 Composite Columns

a) Allowable load - The allowable axial load P
on a composite column consisting of stmctural
steel or cast,iron column thoroughly .encased in
concrete reinforced with both longitudinal and
spiral reinforcement, shall not exceed that given
by the following formula:
. '.
B-3. 3 Long Columns

rh e maximum permissible stress in a reinforced
oncrete column or part thereof having a ratio. of
cifective column length to least lateral dimension above
~2 shall not exceed that which results frollithe
81
IS 45& : 2000
Table 22 Permissible Stresses in Steel Reinforcement
(Clauses B-2.2. B-2.2.1. B-2.3 and B-4.2)
Permissible Stresse,s: In N/mm1
-'i:vpe of Stress in Steel

Reinforcement
SI
No.
(2)
(I)
Mild Steel Bars
Medium Tensile
High Yield Strength
Confonning to
Grade 1 of
Steel Confoffil
iogto IS 432
IS 432 (Part I)
(Part I)
Defanned Bars Confanning to IS 1786

(Grade Fe 415)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Tension ( cr'l or 0'..)
i)
Vp to and including
Zomm
a)
Half the guaranteed
140 }
230
yield stress subject

to a maximum of 190
b) over 20mm
Compression in column
ii)
230
130
130
130
190
bars ( a)
iii)
compression in bars in a
beaIJl or sla~ when the coruM
i ve- resIstance of the
The calculated compressive stress in the surn;>unding concrete multiplied by 1.5

times
the modular ratio or 0'"" whichever is lower
press
. ak .
concrete 18 t en mto account
iv)
Compression in bars in a
beam or s!ab wh,el'e the
compressive re~lstnnce
of the con.crete IS not.
taken into account:

a) VP to and including
ZOlum
b) Over ~o mm
Half the guaranteed

yield stress subject
to a maximum of 190
140 }
190
190
130
NOTES
high yield strength def~nDed bars of Grade Fe 500 the permissible stress in direct
tension and flexural-tensioll; shall be- 0.55,f.,
1 F
~ permjssiqIe stresses for_shear and complession reinforcement shall be as for

Grade Fe 415,
',Y
2 FOf weJded.wire fabric conforming to IS 1566, the pennissible value in tension

0'.1 is 2~O N/mm 2,
3 For the ptllpose of this standard, the yield. stress of steels for which there is
no clearly defined yield point should be taken to be
02 creent proof stres., .
. p
..
Wh n mild steel confol'miM to Grade II of IS 432 (Part 1) is used, the permissible

stresses shall be_90 percent of the permissible
tr e eS in col 3; or jfthe design details have already been worked out on the basis
ofmiId steel conforming to GradefofIS-432,(Part
~)~:~e w:ea of reinforcement shall be illcreased by -10 percent" of that required

for Grade I steel.
20 percent of the gross area of the column. If a

hollow metal core is used. itshall be filled with
concrete. The amount oflongitudinal and spiral
reinforcement and the ~uirements as to spacing
of bars. details ·of splices and thickness of
protective shell outside the spiral. shall conform
to requirements of 26.5.3. A clearance of at
least 75 mm shall be maintained between the
spiral and the metal core at all points. except
that when the core consists of a structural steel
H -column. the minimum clearance may be
reduced to 50 mm.
where
permissihle stress in concrete in direct

compression;
Ac ::;:; net area of concrete section; which is
equal to the gross area of the concrete
section - A~c ~ Am;
permissible compressive stre~s for
O'se :::::
column bars;
cross-sectional area of longitudinal bar
reinforcement;
allowable unit stress in metal core. not to
exceed 125 N/mm' for a steel cOre. 01'
70 N/mm' fora cast iron core; and
the cross-sectional area of the steel or cast
Am
iron core,
b) Metal core and reinforcement -- The crosssectional area ofthe metal core shall
not exceed
c) Splices and connections ofmetal cores - Metal

cores in composite columns shall be accurately
miIled at splices and positive provisions shall
be made for alignment of one coreabove
another. At the column base. provisions shall be
82
IS 456: 2000
made to transfer the load to the footing at safe
unit stresses in accordance with 34.'The base of
the metal section shall be designed to transfer
the load from the entire composite columns to
the footing, or it may be desIgned to transfer
the load from the metal section only, provided
it is placed in the pier 01' pedestal as to leave
ample section of concrete abovethe base for the
transfer of load from the reinforced concrete
section of the' column by means of bond on the
vertical reinforcement and by direct
compressioll on the concrete. Transfer of loads
to the metal core shall be provided for by the
use of bearing members, such as billets,brackets
or other positive connections, these shall be
provided at the top of the metal core and at
intennediate floor levels Where required. The
column as a whole shall satisfy the requirements
of formula given under (a) at any point; in
addition to this, thcTeinforced concrete portion
shall be designed to early, according to B-3.1
or B-3.2 as the case may be, all floor loads
brought into the column at levels between the
metal brackets or connections. In applying the
formulae under B-3.1 or B-3.2 the gross area of
column shall be taken to be the area of the
concrete section outside the metal core, and the
allowable load on,the reinforced concrete section
shall be further limited to 0.281'k times gross
sectional area of the column.
b) The resultant tension in concrete is not greater

. than 35 percent and 25 percent of the resultant
compression for biaxial and uniaxial bending
respectively, or does not exceed three-fourths,
the 7 day modulus of rupture of concrete.
NOTES
10'"""",,= Ac+l~m.\e for columns with ties where P, Ac and

A"" defined in B 3.1 and m is the modular ratio.
a
2 cr~bc,ca\ =
modulus of section. In the case of sections subject to moments

in two directions, the stress shall be calculated separately and
added algebraically.
B-4.2 Design.Based on Cracked Section
If the requirements specifie<! in B-4.1 are notsatistied,

the stresses in concrete and steel shall be calculated
by the theory of cracked section in which the tensile
resistance of concrete is ignored. If the calculated
stresses are within the permissible stress specified h{
Tables 21, 22 and 23 the section may be assumed to be
safe.
'
Nom - The IDuKimnm stress in concrete and steel may be

found from tables and charts based-on the cracked s~ction theory
or directly by detennining the no·stress line which shoui~ satisfy
the following requirements:
d) Allowable Load on Metal Core Only -, rhe

metal core of composite columns shall be
designed to carry safely any cOnstruction or
other loads to be placed upon them prior to their
encasement in concrete.
B-4 MEMBERS. SUBJECTED TO COMBINED
AXIAL LOAD AND BENDING
B-4.l Design Based on Uneracked Section
0' ce, cnl
+ (jcbc,cal :::; 1
0' cc
0' che
a)
The di'rectload should-b6-eqlUil to the algebni~c sum Qf

lhe forces on concrete and steel,
b)
The moment of _the extemalloads about any reference

line should be equal to the algebraic sum of the moment
of theJorces in co'ncrete- {ignoring ;the tensil~ force in
concrete) and steel 'about the same line, and
<
c)
The moment of the external loads about .any other .

reference lines should be equal to the algebraic sum of
the-moment ofthe foroos in concrete (ignoring the tensile'
force in concrete) and steel about the same line.
B-4.3 Members Subjected to Combined Direct

Load and Flexure
A member subjected to axi.noad and bending (due to

eccentricity of load, monolithic construction, lateral
forces, etc) shall be considered safe provided the
following conditions are satisfied:
a)
M
Z
where M equals the moment -and Z equals
Members subjecred to combined direct load and flexure
and shall be designed by limit state method as in 39,5
after applying appropriate load factors as given in.Thble
18.
B-5 SHEAR
B-S.l Nominal Shear Stress
where
= calculated direct compressive stress
The nominal shear stress '1', in beams or slabs of

unifonn depth shall be calculated by the following
equation:
in concrete,
:::: permissible axial compressive stress

in concrete,
"r=-
= calculated bending compressive

stre.ss in concrete, and
bd
where
_ permissible bendihg·compressive
V. = shear force due to designloads,
stre~s in concr~te_.
83
IS 456: 2000
= breadth oflhe member, which for flanged
B·S.2.1.1 For solid slabs the pennissible shear stress

in concrete shall be kT, where k has the value given
below:
sections shall be taken as the breadth of

.the web, and
d
= effective depth.
Overall depth 300 or 275 250 225 200 175 150 or

of slab, mm more
less
k
1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30
B-5.I.t Beams of Varying Depth

In the case of beams of varying depth, the equation
shall be modified as:
NOTE - This does not apply to flat slabs for which 31.6 shall
apply.
V + Mtanf3
B·S.2.2 Shear Strength of Members Under Axial

Compression
Tv = --:-bd-C."--
For members subjected to axial compression P,
the permissible shear stress in concrete 't c given
where
in Table 23, shall be mUltiplied by the following

factor:
'tv' V, band d are the same as in B.S.l,
M =
I) = 1+~ , but not exceeding 1.5

bending moment at the section', and
A,hk
13 = angle between the top and the bottom
where
P
edges of the beam.
= axial compressive force in N,

Ag = gross area of the concrete section in mm2 ,
The negative sign in the fonnula applies when the

bending moment M increases numerically in the same
direction as the effective depth d increases, and the .
positive sign when the moment decreases numerically
in this direction.
and
fck = characteristic compressive strength of

concrete.
B·S.2.3 With Shear Reinforcement
B·5.2 Design Shear Strength of Concrete
When shear reinforcement is provided the nomfnal
B-S.2.t The pennissible shear stress in concrete in

beams '!Vithout shear reinforcement is given in Table 23.
shear stress tc iiI beams shan npt excee~ 't'c ~x ,given in

.
Table 24.
Table 23 Permissible Shear Stress in Concrete

(Clauses B-2.1.B-2.3, B-4.2, B-5.2.1, B-5.2.2, B'S.3, B-S.4, B-S.5.l, B.S.5.3, B-
6.3.2,B-6.3.3 and B-6.4.3 and Table 21)
100 A
bd
Permissible Shear Stress in Concrete, 't., N/mml
Grade of Concrete
MI5
M20
M25
M30
'M35
M40
and above
(I)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
_,(6)
(7)
,; 0.15
0.18
0.18
0.19
0.20.
0.20
O.2Q
0.25.
0.22
0.22
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
050
0.29
0.30
0.31
0.31
0.31
0.32
0.75
0.34
0.35
0.36
0.37
0.37
0.38
1.00
1.25 .
1.50
1.75
0.37
0.39
0.40
0.42
0.42
0.40
OA2
0.44
OAI
OA5
OA;
0.46
0.42
0.45
0.46
0.48
0.49
OA9
0.44
0.47
0.49
0.50
052
052
2.00
OM
0.49
0.51
0.53
0.54
055
2.25
0.44
051
0.53
0.55
0.56.
0.57
2.50
OM
0.51
055
0.57
0.58
0.60
2.75
0.44
0.51
056
0.58
0.60
0.62
3.00 and
above
0.44
051
057
0.60
0.62
0.63
NOTE - A. is that area of longitudinal tension reinforcement which continues at

least one effective depth beyond the section being
considered except nt supports where the full area of tension reinforcement may be
used provided the detailing cORfonns to 26.2.2 and
26.2.3.
84
IS 456: 2000
greater than 230 N/mm',
B-S.2.3.1 For slabs, 'f. shall not exceed half the value
0("cmax given in Table 24.
= angle between the inclined stirrup or
bent-up bar and the axis of the member,

not less than 45", and
B-5.3 Minimum Shear Reinforcement

When 1: is less than 1:, given in Table 23,minimum
shear reinforcement shall be provided in accordance
with 26.5.1.6.
NOTE -
b) Bent-up bars along with stirrups, and
Where more than one type of shear reinforcement is
used to reinforce the. same portion of the beam, the total shear
resistance shall be computed as the sum of the resistance for the
B-5.4 Design of Shear Reinforcement

When 1: exceeds 1:, given in Table 23, shear
reinforce;',tent shall be provided in any of the following
forms:
a) Vertical stirrups,
= effective depth.
various types separately. The area of the stirrups' shall not be
less than the minimum specified in 26.5.1.6.
B-5.5 Enhanced Shear Strength of Sections Close

to Supports
B·5.S.1 General
c) Inclined stirrups.
Where bent-up bars are provided, their contribution
towards shear resistance shall not be more than half
that of the total shear reinforcement.
Shear failure at sections of beams and cantilevers

without shear reinforcement will normally occur on
plane inclined at an angle 30" to the horizontal. If the
angle of failure plane is forced to be inclined more
Shear reinforcement shall be provided to carry a shear' steeply than this [because
the section considered
equal to V - 1:,.bd. The strength of shear reinforcement (X - Xl in Fig. 24 is
close to a support or for other
reasons1. the shear force required to produce failure is
V, shall be calculated as below:
increased.
a) For vertical stirrups
The enhancement of shear strength may be taken
into account in the design of sections near a support
V. = a sv Asv d
by increasing design shear strength of concrete, ",
,
Sv
to 2d ,,/a. provided that the design shear stress at
b) For inclined sthrups or a series of bars bent-up
the face of support remain's less than the values
at different cross-sections:
given in Table 23. Account: may be. taken of the
enhancement in any situation where the section
= a sv sAsv d (sin a + cos a)
considered is closer to the face of a.support of
v
concentrated load than twice the effective depth, d.
c) For single bar or single group of parallel bars,
To be effective, tension reinforcement shohld. extend
all bent-up at the same cross-section:
on each side of the point where it is intersected by a
possible failure plane for a distance at least equal to
Ys ;::: 0' sv AsV' sin ex.
the effective depth, or be provided with an
where
equivalent anchorage.
total cross-sectional area of stirrup legs
A ,.
B-5.5.2 Shear Reinforcement for Sections Close to
or bent-up bars within a distance,
Supports
.
spacing of the stirrups or bent-up bars
s
• = along the length of the member,
If shear reinforcement is required, the total area of this
is given by:
design shear strength of the concrete,
,
v.
"
=
= breadth of the member which for
A, = a,b ('f, - 2d "/a.l/0.87f, ~ O.4a,b /0.87f,

= permissible tensile stress in shear
This reinforcement should be provided' within the

middle three quarters of a•. Where a. is less than d,
horizontal shear reinforcement will be more effective
than vertical.
flanged bearns, shall be taken as the

breadth of the web bw'
reinforcement which shall not be taken
Table 24 Maximum Shear Stress, "< m,,' N/mm'

(Clauses B-5.2.3, B-5.2.3.1, B-5.5.1 andB-6.3.1)
Concrete Grade
MIS
M20
M25
M30
M3S
M 40 and above
1.6
1.8
1.9
2.2
23·
2.5
85
IS 456: 2000
V = shear,
T = torsional moment, and
B-S.S.3 Enhanced Shear Strength Near Supports

(Simplified Approach)
The procedure given in B-S.S.I and B-S.S.2 may be
used for all beams. However for beams carrying
generally uniform load or where the principal load is
located further than 2 d from the face of support, the
shear stress may be calculated at a section a distance d·
from the face of support. The value of~, is calculated
in accordance with Table 23 and appropriate shear
reinforcement is provided at sections closer to the
support, no further check for such section is required.
b '" breadth of beam.

The equivalent nominal shear stress, 'tvc' in this case
shaIl be calculated as given in B-S.I, except for
substituting V by V" The values of '!'"shaIl not exceed
the values of '1', m~ given in Table 24.
B-6.3.2 If the equivalent nominal shear stress '1'" does
not exceed 'tc' given in Table. 23, minimum shear
reinforcement shall be provided as specified
in 26.5.1.6.
B-6.3.3 If 't'" exceeds T, given in Table 23, both
longitudinal and transverse reinforcement shall be
provided in accordance with B-6.4 ..
B-6 TORSION
B-6.1 General
In structures where torsion is required to maintain
equilibrium, members shall be designed for torsion in
accordance with B-6.2, B-6.3 and B-6.4. However, for
such iudetenninate structures where torsion can be
eliminated by releasing redundent restraints, no
specific design for torsion is necessary provided
torsional stiffness is neglected in the calculation of
internal forces. Adequate control of any torsional
cracking is provided by the shear reinforcement as
per B-S.
B-6.4 Reinforcement in Members Subjected to

Torsion
8-6.4.1 Reinforcement for torsion, when required,
shaIl consist of longitudinal and transverse
reinforcement.
8-6.4.2 Longitudinal Reinforcement
The longitudinal reinforcement shaIl be designed to
resist an equivalent bending moment, Mel' given by
M,j=M+M,
NOTE - The ilPproach to design in this clause for torsion is as
where
follows:
lbrsional q:infotcement is not cruculated separately from
that required. for bending and shear. Instead the total
100lgitudinal reinforcement is detelluined for a fictitious
bending moment which is a fUnction -of actual bending
moment and torsion; similarly web reinforcement is
determined for a fictitious shear which is a function ofnctual
shear and torsion.
M = bending moment atthe cross-section, and

M=
, T
(l+Dlb)
1.7
.
.
,whereT is the torsional
moment, D is the overaIl depth of the

beam and b is the breadth of the beam.
B-6.4.2.1 If the numerical value of M, as detlned .
in B-6.4.2 exceeds the numerical value of the moment
M, longitudinal reinforcement shaIl be provided on
the flexural compression face, such that the beam can
also withstand an equivalent moment MOl given by
M,,'" M,-M, the moment Mc:i being taken as acting in
the opposite sense to the moment M.
B-6.1.1 The design· rules laid down in B-6.3

and B-6.4 shaIl apply to beams of solid rectangular
cross-section. However, these clauses may also be
applied to flanged beams by substituting bw for b, in
which case they are generaIly conservative; therefore
specialist literature may be referred to.
B·6.2 Critical Section
B-6.4.3 Transverse Reinforcement
Sections located less than a distance d, from the face

of the support may be designed for the same torsion as
computed at a distance d, where d is the effective
depth.
Two legged closed hoops enclosing the corner

longitudinal bars shall have an area of cross-section
A~v' given by
Ts
Vs
. v +
d' v , but the total
bid] O"sv
2.5 1 (J'sv
transverse reinforcement shall not be less than
B-6.3 Shear and Torsion

A '"
sv
B·6.3.1 Equivalent Shear

Equivalent shear, V, shall be calculated from the
formula:
(-rve -tc)b.sy
0'"
V, '" V+1.6b
where'
T = torsional moment,
V = shear force,
where
v: = equivalent shear,
86
IS 456: 2000
s, = spacing of the stirrup reinforcement.
b, =
d, =
b
(J
"
= permissible tensile stress in shear

reinforcement,
centre-to-centre distance between corner

bars in \he direction of the wid\h.
t ,. =
centre-to-centre distance between comer

bars in the direction of \he depth.
equivalent shear stress as specified in

B-6.3.1. and
t, =
shear strength of the concrete as specified

.
in Table 23.
bread\h of \he member.
87
IS 456': 2000
ANNEX C
(Clauses 22.3.2, 23.2.1 and 42.1)
CALCULATION OF DEFLECTION
For continuous beams, deflectionshall be calculated
using the values of I" I;, 'and M, modified by the
following equation:
C-l TOTAL DEFLECTION

C-l.! The total deflection shall be taken as the sum of
the short-term deflection determined in accordance
with C-2 and the long-term deflection, in accordance
with C·3 and C·4.
X=k [XI +X
]+(I_k)X
2
2
where
C·2 SHORT·TERM DEFLECTION
X, = modifi<id value of X,
Xl' X, = values of X at the supports,

. X" = value of X at mid span,
C.2.1 The short-term deflection may be calculated by

the usual methods for elastic deflections using the
short-term modulus of elasticity of concrete, E, and
an effective moment of inertia I'ff given by the
following equation:
k,
= coefficient given in Table 25, and
X = value of It' Igt or M, as appropriate.

C·3 DEFLECTION DUE TO SHRINKAGE
C·3.1 The deflection due to shrinkage a~ may be

computed from the following equation:
a C8 = k3 Pes [2
where
k, is a constant depending upon the support
where
I,. = moment of inertia of the cracked section,
conditions,
fer Igr
M, = cracking moment, equal to -y,- where
0.5 for cantilevers,

0.125 for simply supported tuembers,
I" is the modulus of rupture of concrete,
0.086 for members continuous at one end,

and
I" is the moment of inertia of the gross

section about the centroidal axis,
0.063 for fully continuous mernbers.
neglecting the reinforcement, and Y,is the

distance from centroidal axis of gross
section, neglecting the reinforcement, to
'P" is shrinkage curvature equal to k, ;;
extreme fibre in tension

M = maximum moment under service loads,
Z - 1ever ann,
x = depth of neutral axis,
d = effective depth,
bw = breadth of web, and
b = breadth of compression face.
where E" is the ultimate shrinkage strain of concrete

(see 6.2.4),
k, =0.72 X P, ;/.', s 1.0 for 0.25 S Pt - P, < 1.0
-yP,
= 0.65 x
Table 25 Values of Coefficient, k,

(Clause C-2.!)
k,
0.5 or less
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
. 1.3
1.4
k,
0.03
0.08
0.16
0.30
0.50
0.73
0.91
0.97
1.0
NOTE -
Is is given by
k _ MJ +M2
2 MF! +Mru
where
M 1,M2 = support moments, and
MI'J,Mn = fixed end moments.
88
IS 456: 2000.
. where
where P = 100 As, and P " 100 As,
bd
'bd
a"", (,....)
pennanent loads obtained using an

, " elastid analysis with an effective
modulus of elasticity,
and D is the total depth of the section, and I is the

length of span. .
C·4 DEFLE<;TION DUE TO CREEP
"
C-4.1 The creep deflection due to petmanent loads

a
. maybe obtained from the following equation:
w~~)
= initial plus creep deflection due to
aiid
. .
ai(""",)
ace (perm) = a~CC(perm) - al(perm)
~;
6 being the creep coefficient, ,
1+6'
"
= short-term deflection due to

permanent load using E,.
...., ,
! .'.
89
IS 456: 2000
ANNEX D
(Clauses 24.4 and 37.1.2)
SLABS SPANNING IN TWO DIRECTIONS

D-l.6 At a discontinuous edge, negative moments may
arise. They depend on the degree of fixity at the edge
of the slab but, in. general. tension reinforcement equal·
to 50 percent of that provided at mid-span extending
0.1 I into the span will be sufficient.
D-l RESTRAINED SLABS

D-1.0 When the corners of a slab are prevented from
lifting, the slab may be designed as specified in D-l.l
to D-1.ll.
. D-I.1 The maximum bending moments per unit width
in a slab are given by the following equations:
D-l.7 Reinforcement in edge strip, parallel to that

edge, shall comply with the minimum given in Section
3 and the requirements for torsion given in D-1.S
to D-1.10.
Mx=axwJ;
My =ay
wi;
D-l.S Torsion reinforcement shall be provided at any

corner where the slab is simply supported on both
edges meeting at that corner. It shall consist of top
and bottom reinforcement, each with layers of bars
placed parallel to the sides of the slab and extending
from the edges a minimum distance of one-fifth of
the shorter span. The area of reinforcement in each of
these four layers shall be three-quarters of the area
required for the maximum mid-span moment in the
slab.
where
a, and ex,. are coefficients given in Table 26,

w = total design load per unit area,
M" My = moments on strips of unit width
spanning I, and Iy respectively,
and
I, and Iy
= lengths of the shorter span and

longer span respectively.
D-I.2 Slabs are considered as divided in each direction

into middle strips and edge strips as shown in Fig. 25
the middle strip being three-quarters of the width and
each edge strip one-eight of the width.
D-l.9 Torsion reinforcement equal to half that
described in D-l.S shall be 'provided at a corner
contained by edges over only one of which' the slab is
continuous.
D-I.3 The maximum moments calculated as in D-l.l

apply only to the middle strips and no redistribution
shall be made.
D-l.4 Tension reinforcement provided at mid-span in
the middle strip shall extend in the lower part of the
slab to within 0.251 of a continuous edge, or 0.151 of
a discontinuous edge.
'.
D-l.lO Torsion reinforcements need not I)e·provided

at any corner contained by edges over both of whiCh
the slab is continuous.
D-I.l1 Torsion 1/ I, is greilter than 2, the slabs shall
be designed as spanning one way.
D-2 SIMPLY SUPPORTED SLABS
D-I.S Over the continuous edges of a middle strip,

the tension rejnforcement shall extend in the upper part
of the slab a distance ofO.15lfrom the support, and at
least 50 perccent shall extend a distance of 0.3 I.
D-2.l When simply supported slabs do not have

adequate provision to resist t.orsion at corners and to
prevent the corners from lifting, the maximum
25A FOR SPAN ~
258 FOR SPAN I, .
FIG. 25
DIVISION OF SLAB INTO MIDOLE AND EDGE STRIPS
90
IS 456: 2000
Table 26 Bending Moment cOefficients for Rectangular Panels Supported on
Four Sides with Provision for Torsion at Corners
(Clauses D-l.1 and 24.4.1)
Case
No.
Short Span Coefficients a.

(Values oftyll.)
Type of Panel and

Moments Considered
Long Span
Coefficients
o.y forAII
r
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.75
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(II)
0.032
0.024
0.037
0.028
0.043
0.032
0.047
0.036
0.051
0.039
0.053
0.041
0.060
0.045
0.065
0.049
0.032
0.024
0.037
0.028
0.043
0.032
0.048
0.036
0.051
0.039
0.055
0.041
0.057
0.044
0.064
0.048
0.068
0.052
0.037
0.028
0.037
0.028
0.044
0.033
0.052
0.039
0.057
0.044
0.063
0.047
0.067
0.051
0.077
0.059
0.085
0.065
0.037
0.028
0.047
0.035
0.053.
0.040
0.060
0.045
0.065
0.049
0.071
0.053
Om5
0.056
0.084
0.063
0.091
0.069
0.047
Om5
0.045
0.D35
0.049
0.037
0.052
0..040
0.056
0.043
0.059
0.044
0.060
0.045
0.065
0.049
0.069
0.052
0.D35
0.035
0..043
0.051
0.0.17
0.063
0.068
0.080
0..088
0.045
0.035
0.057
0.043
0.064
0.048
0.071
~O.053
0.076
0.057
0.080
0.060
0.084
0.064
0.09l
0.069
0.097
0.073
0.043
0.043
0.051
0.059
0.0.65
0.071
0.076
0.087
0.096
0.057
0.043
0.056
0.064
0.072
0.079
0.085
0.089
0.100
0.107
0.056
(2)
(I)
Values of
"
2.0
'I',
Interior Panels:
Negative moment at continuous edge
Positive moment at mid-span
2
One Short Edge Continuous:

One Long Edge Discontinuous:

positive moment at mid-span
4
1Wo Adjacent Edges D.iscontinuous:

nvo Short Edges Di.~c(mtinu(}us:

Negative moment at continuous ed-ge
Positive'moment at mid··span
'6
Tho Long Edges Di.Ycontinu()us:


7
Three Edges Disco1Uinu(Jus

(One Long Edge Continuous):

8
Three Edges Disc01Uinuous

(One Short Edge Continuous) :

9
Four Edges Discontinuous:

and a, and a are moment coefficients

given il, Table
moments per unit width are given by ihe following

equation:
17
M, =0:, w,2
'x
0-2.1.1 At least 50 percent of the tension

reinforcement provided at mid-span should extend
to the supports. The remaining 50 percent should
extend to within 0.1 I, or 0.1 I, of the support, as
appropriate.
where
M x My W, I ,1y are same as those in D.. l.1,
I
Table 27 Bending Moment Coefficients for Slabs Spanning in 'l\vo Directions at

Right Angles, Simply Supported on Four Sides
(Clause D-Z.J)
l/lx
1.0
l.l
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.75
2.0
2.5
3.0
n.
n,
0.062
0.074
0.084
0.093
0.099
0.104
0.113
0:118
0.122
0.124
0.059
0.055
0.051
0.046
0.037
0.029
0.020
0.014
0.062
0.061
91
IS 456: 2000
ANNEX E
(Clause 25.2)
EFFECTIVE LENGTH OF COLUMNS
E.t In the absence of more exact analysis, the effective

length of columns in framed structures may be obtained
from the ratio of effective length to unsupported length
1,/1 given in Fig. 26 when relative displacement ofthe
ends of the column is prevented and in Fig. 26 when
relative lateral displacement of the ends is not
prevented. In the latter case, it is recommendded that
the effective length ratio 1,,11 may not be taken to be
less than 1.2.
E.2 Th determine whether a column is a no sway or

a sway column, stability index Q may be computed as
given below:
where
LP, = sum of axial loads on all column in the

storey,
6, = elastically computed first order lateral
NOTES
deflection,
H, = total lateral force acting within the storey,
and
height
of the storey.
h, =
1 Figures 26 and 27 afe reproduced from 'The Structural

Engineer' No.7, Volume 52. July 1974 by the permission
of the Council of the Institution of Structuml Engineers,
UX.
where the summation is to be done for the members

framing into ajoint at top and bottom respectively; and K",
and Kh being the flexural stiffness foc·column and beam
respectively,
If Q 5 0.04, then the column in the frame may be taken

as no sway column, otherwise the column will be
considered as sway columnn.
E.3 For normal usage assuming idealized conditions,
the effective length I" of in a given plane may be
assessed on the basis of Table 28.
Cl
UJ
Cl
UJ
<!l
;;£;,
><
:c
U.
FIG.26
EFFECTIVE LENG1H RATIOS FOR A COLUMN IN A FRAME WITH NO SWAY
92
IS 456: 2000
HINGEDI.O
0.8
0.7
O. 6 k:--+--P"-d-~c--p.."
1
13
O.S 1--+-~:----1~~
0.' 1::--+""""-+--+--'"
0.3
0.2
0.1
FIXED
HINGED
0
0
UJ
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.' 0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8 0.9
(32
1:S
u.
FIG. 27 EFPEcTIVB LENGTH RATIOS FOR A COLUMN IN
FRAMB WITHOUT RESTRAINT AGAINST SWAY
93
A'
1.0
IS 456: 2000
Table 28 Effective Lengtb of Compression Members
(CI~use E·3)
Degree of End
Restraint of Compression Members
Length
Recommended
Value of
Effective
Length
(2)
(3)
(4)
:c
0501
0.65/
0.701
0.80/
1.001
1.00 I
1.00 1
1.20
~ffect1vc
(I)
Effectively -held in
position and restrained
against rotation in
both ends
Effectively held in
position at both ends,
restrained against
rotation at one end
Effectively held in
position at both cnds.
but not restrained
against rotation
Effectively held in
against rotation at one
end. and at the other
restrained against
rotation but not held

in position
Effectively held in
against rotation in
one end, and at the
other partiaJly restr~
ained against rotation
but not held in position
Effectively held in
position at one end
but not restrained
against rotation, and
at the other end restrained
aguinst rotation
but not heJd in position
Effectively held in
against rotation at one
end but not held in
position nor restrained
against rotation at the
other end
Theoretical
Value of
Symbol
:r
L
1:
I
.
I-,J '
,-
'
'1.501
~
,/1
NOTE - I is the unsupported length of compression member.
94
2.00 1
2.00 I
2.00 1
2.00/
IS 456: 2000
ANNEX F
(Clauses 35.3.2 and 43.1)
CALCULATION OF CRACK WIDTH

;
Provided that the strain in th~ tension reiitforce~ent

. 1'_' ted to 0 8 FIE,
the design surface
crack width,
18111. . . . .
y
I
.
.
whicb should not exceed the approprIate value given
in 3S .3.2 may be calculated from the following
x = the depth from the compression face to the

neutral axis,
f., =' the maximum compressive stress in the
equation:
Desig;n surface crack width
!, = the tensile stress in the reinforcement, and
W" =
E, = the modulus of elasticity of the reinforcement
_.......:3~a::.;cl!.r-=e.!!!m':-,
I +
concrete,
Z( acr - C)
mi.
h -x
where
a" = distance from the point considered to the

surface of the nearestJongitudinal bar,
e mi. = minimum cover to the longitudinal bar;

em = average steel strain at the level considered,
'" overillldepth of the member. and
x
'" depth of the neutral axis.
. Alternatively, as an approximation. it will normally

be satisfactory to calculate the steel stress on the basis
ofa cracked section and then reduce this by an amount
equal to the tensile forCe generated by the triangular .
distributions. having a value of zero at the rieutral axis
and a valne .at the centroid of the tension steel of
IN/mm' instantaneously, reducing to 0.55 N/mm'in
the long-term. acting over the tension zone divided by
the steel area. For a rectangular tension zone. this gives
b (h-x)(a-x)
3Es As (d-x)
The {lverage steel strahl em may be calculated on the

basis cjf the following assumption:
wbere
A, = area of tension reinforcement,
= width of the section at the centroid of the
The ·c6.ncrete and the stee~ are both c?nsidered to ~e
full), elastic in tension and m compressIOn. The elastic

dul us ofthe steel may be taken as ZOO kN/mrn' and
mo
. as d'
the "lastic modulus of the concrete IS
erIvedfrom
the equation given in 6.2.3.1 both in compression and
e, = strain at the level considered, calculated
in tension.
tension steel,
ignoring the stiffening of the concrete in

the tension zone,
These assumptions are illustrated in Fig. 28.
from the carnpression face to the .

= distance
point at which the crack width is being
calculated. and
where
h = the overall depth of the section.
d
fs/Ec
= effective depth.
fc
~-+---STRt:SS
IN .CONCRETE
1 N/mm2 IN SHORT TERM
O·SSN/mm 2 IN LONG TERM
As •
SECTION CRACKEO
STRESS
STRAIN
FIG. 28
95
IS 456:2000
ANNEX G
(Clause 38.1)
MOMENTS OF RESISTANCE FOR RECTANGULAR AND

T-SECTIONS
G-O 'The moments of resistance of rectangular and
T-seetions based on the assumptions of38.t are given
in this ann~x.
el'ceeds- the limiting value-,': Mil. lim compres-si<:m

reinforcement may be obtained from the, following
equation:
M !l - M u,lim =/.sc A sc '(d:"'d')
G-t RECTANGULARSECTIONS
where
G-1.1 S'ections WithoufCompression

Reinforcement
M.,M•. 11m' d are same as in G-l.t,
The JIloment of resistance of rectangular .sections

without corupression reinforcement shoUld, be obtained
as follows:
a) , Determine the depth of netutral axis from the
following equation :
x"
0.87/y A.,
0.36 10k h.d
1r.c;;:;: design stress in compression reinforcement corresponding to a strain of

0.003
,xu, mnx.
where
If the value of xjd is less than the limiting

value (see Note below 38.1), calculate the
moment of resistance by the following
e~pressio:n :
b)
A
is given by the following expression:
~k
x.
= depth of neutral axis,
=.
Iy
= characteristic strength of reinforcement,

=. area of tension reinforcement,
=.
characteristic compressive; strength
/1,
width of the compression face,
= area of the total.tensile reinfor.cement,.
G-2.1 For x.< D,. the moment of resistance may be

calculated from the equation given in G-1.t.
G-2.2 The limiting value of the moment of resistance
of the section may be obtained by the following
equation'when the ratio Dr I d dOeSjlO1 exceed 0.2 :
xU,lnlll[
a section without compression

reinforcement, and
= limiting value of x. from 39.t.
M u ;036
"'u,in" ·(1-0 42 x u •m"
.
. d
'. d
b~ ~oncrete;
+0.45/ok (b,-bw
limiting moment of resistance of
),
Jck
bwd 2
)D,(d-; )
where
M u, x
u,ma~
, d ;ndfk
are same as
c
in G-t.t,
bl = breadth of the compression face/flange,
Section with Compression Reinforcement
b w = breadth of the web, and
Where the ultimate moment of resistance of section
Dr= thickness of the flange,
G-t.2
-'.
--,
depth of compression. reinforcement.

.
from compr~ssion face.'
G-2 FLANGED SECTION
effective depth,
=.
/;k
d'
A,\2 = A,J,/ 0.87 I r •
In the above equations,
A,I
mea ofcompression
reinforcemen~ .and
.
singly reinlorcect sectio,n f.o;f,:Mu:, ilni1
If x,l d is greater than the limiting value, the

section should be redesigned.
d)
=.
and
'" 0.36 x",'ntru< '(1 -0.42 xu, ntH' ')bd 2 J;

d
A~
"
AS!I = area of the tensile reinforcement' for a
value, the moment of resistance of the section
tb\:t,limiting. value:of xu' from 38.1~
where
If the value of x,ld is equal to the limiting
MUIllm
Xu, 'inllX _ .
The total area of tension reinfof<:ement shalt be

obtained from the follbwing e,quation :
M" =. 0 . 87 Jy~ '~,

" d(1 _ A" Iy )
,
bd/o
c)
s(X u, max -d'}
96
IS 456: 2000
G-2.2.1 When the ratio D/d exceeds 0.2, the moment· wherc.Y = (0.15 x, + 0.65 Dr)'
but not greater than
r
of resistance of the section may be calculated by the Dr' and the other symbols are
same as in G-l.1
following equation:
and G-2.2.
xu,max (1-0.42 xu, max ) , b d
Mu-036
-'
d
d
10k W
+ 0A5fok (bf -bw)yf
Ga2.3 For x~,' mill[ ~u > Dr' the moment of resistance

may be calculated by the equations given in G-2.2
when D/x, does not exceed 0.43 and G-2.2.1 when
D fIxII exceeds 0.43; in botli cases substituting x,II millt
by xu'
>.
(d- ~ )
Civil Junction
97
IS 456: 2000
ANNEX H
(Foreword)
COMMITTEE COMPOSITION
Cement and Concrete Sectional Committee, CED 2
Chairman
DR H. C. VISVESVARYA
'Chandrlka' • at 15th Cross,
63~64. Malleswnram. BangaJore 560 003
Representing
Members
DR S. C. AHLUWALIA
OCL India, New Delhi
SURI G. R. BHAR!IKAR
B, G. Shirlee & Construction Technology Ltd, Pune

The Associated Cement Companies Ltd, Mumbai
SHRf T. N. TIWARI
DR D, GHOSH (Alternate)
Central Public Works Department, New Delhi
CHIEF ENGINBER (DESIGN)
SUPERINTBN'DINO ENGINEER (8&S) (Alternate)
Snrdar Sarovar Narmnn Nigam Ltd, Gandhinagar
CHIEF ENOINEER, NAVAGAM DAM
SUPERINTENDING ENGiNEER (QCC) (Alternate)
Irrigation and Power Research- Institute. Amritsar
CHIEF ENOINEER (RESBARCH-CUM-DIRECrOR)

RESEARCH OflFlCER (CONCRBTI! TECHNOLOGY) (Alternate)
DIRECTOR
JOINT DIREcroR (Alternate)
AP. Engineering Research Laboratories, Hyderabad
DIRECTOR (CMDD) (N&W)
Central Water Commission, New Delhi
DEPUTY DIRECTOR (CMDD) (NW&S) (Alternate)

Hyderabad Industries Ltd, Hyderabad
SHRI K. H. GANOWAL
SHRI V. PATrABHI (Alternate)
SHRI V. K. GHANBKAR
Structural Engineering Research Centre (CSIR), Ghnz.iabad
SHRI S. GOPINATH
The India Cements Ltd, Chennat
SURf R. T,u.m,AKARAN (Alternate)
Gannon Dunkerley & Co Ud, Mumbai
SHRI S. K. GUllA THAKuRTA

SHRr S. P. SANKARANARAYANAN (Alternate)
Central Building Research Institute' (CSIR), Roorkee
SHRI N. S. BHAL
DR IRSHAO MASOOD (Alternate)
SHRI N. C. JAIN
Cement Corporation of India, New Delhi
JOINT DIRECTOR STANDARDS (8&S) (CBMI)

JOINT DIREcrOR STANDARDS (B&S) (CBMII) (Altenrate)
Research, Designs & Standards Organization (Ministry of Roilway).

Lucknow
SHRI N, O. JOSHI
Indian Hume Pipes Co Ltd. Mumbai
SHRI P. D. KELKAR (Alternate)
National Test House. Calcutta
SHRI D. K. KANUNGO
SHRt B.R. MEENA (Alternate)

Larsen and Toubro Limited. Mumbai
SHRI P. KRISHNAMURTIIY
SHIll S. CHAKRAVARTHY (Alternate)
Structural Engineering Research Centre (CSIR), Chennai
DR A. O. MADHAVA RAO
SaRI K. MANI (Alternate)
SHRI J. SARUP
HospitaJ Services Consultancy Cotpomtion (India) Ltd.

New Delhi
SHRf PRAFULLA KUMAR
Ministry of Surface Transport, Department of Surface Transport

(Roads Wing), New Delhi
SHRI P. P. NAIR (Alternate)
(Continued (In page 99)
98
IS .456 : 2000
(Continued.trom page 98)
Members
Repre,Yenling
Central Board of Irrigation and Power, New Delhi
MEMBER SECRETARY
DIRECTOR (CiVIL) (Alternate)

SHRI S, K. NATHAN!, SO I
Engineel'-in-Chief's Branch, Anny Headquarters, New Delhi
DR A. S. GOEL, BE (Alternate)
SHRIS.S.SEBHRA
Central Road Research Institute (CSIR), New Delhi
SHIH SATANDER KUMAR (Alternate)
SURI Y. R. PHULL
Indian Roads Congress. New Delhi
SHRI A, K. SHARMA (Alternate)
National Council for Cement and Building Materials, New Delhi
DR C, RAJKUMAR
DR K. MaliAN (Alternate)
SHRt O. RAMDAS
Directorate Genernl of Supplies and Disposals, New Delhi
SIlRI R. C. SHARMA (Alternate)
SIiRI S. A. REnD!
Gammon India Ltd, Mumbai
SHRI J. S. SANGANBRIA
Geological Survey of India. Calcutta
SHRr L. N. AOARWAL (Alternate)
Central Soil aod Materials Research Station, New Delhi
SARI VUNKATACHALAM
SHIH N. CHANDRASEKARAN (Alternate)
SUPERINTENDING ENGINEER (DESION)
Public Works Department, Government of Tamil Nadu, Chennai
EXECUTIVE ENGINBER (S.M.R.DlvISION) (Alternate)

SHRI A. K. CHADHA
Hindustao Prefab Ltd, New Delhi
SHRI J. R. SIL (Alternate)

DR
H. C. VISVBSVARAYA
The Institution of Engineers (India), Calcutta
SHRI D. C, CHATURVEDI (Alternate)

SHRI V(NOD KUMAR
Director General, BIS (Ex·(rfficio Me~ber)
Director (Clv Eogg)

Member-Secretaries
SHRI 1. K, PRASAD
Addl Director (Civ Ellgg), BIS
SHRI SANJAY PANT
Deputy Director (Civ Engg), BIS
Panel for Revision of Design Codes

Convener
DR C, RAlKUMAR
National Council for Cement and Building Materials, Ballabgarh
Members
SHRI
V, K, GHANEKAR
Structural Engineering Research Centre, Ghaziabad

Central Public Works Department, New ,Delhi
Central Public Works Department. New Delhi
National Council for Cement and Building Materials, Ballabgarh
SHRI S. A. REOOI
SimI JOSE KURIAN
DR A. K. MI'ITAL
DR S. C. MAITI
DR ANIL KUMAR (Alternate)
PROP A.K. JAIN
University of Roorkee. Roorkee

Scoool of Planning and Architecture, New Delhi
DR V, THIRUVENODAM
(COIitinued an page 100)

99
I
\
18456: 2000
(CtmtinuedfrrJm POle 991
Special Ad-Hoc Group for Revision of IS 456

C(Jnvener
DR H.C. VISVESVARYA
'Chandrika' at 15th Cross,

63·64, MaJleswnram\ Bnngalore 560 003
Representing
Members
SHRI S.A. REDm
Gammon Indin Ltd, Mumbai
DR C, RAJKUMAR
National Council for Cemenl and Building Materials, BaUabg.arb
100
Bureau of Indian Standards

BIS is a statutory institution established,unaet the Bureau of Indian Standards
Act, 1986 to promote
harmonious development of the activities of standardization, marking and quality
certification of goods
and attending to connected matters in the country.
Copyright
BIS has the copyright of all its publications. No part of these publications may be
reproduced in any form
without the prior permission in writing of BIS. This does not preclude the free
use, in the course of
implementing the standard, of necessary details, such as symbols and sizes, type or
grade designations.
Enquiries relating to copyright be addressed to the Director (publications), BIS.
Review of Indian Standards
Amendments are issued to standards as the need arises on the basis of comments.
Standards are also reviewed
periodically; a standard along with amendments is reaffirmed when such review
indicates that no changes are
needed; if the review indicates that changes are needed, it is taken up for
revision. Users of Indian Standards
should ascertain that they are in possession of the latest amendments or edition by
referring to the latest issue of
'BIS Catalogue' and 'Standards: Monthly Additions'.
This Indian Standard has been developed from Doc No.: CED 2(5525).
Amendments Issned Since Pnblication

Amend No.
Date of Issue
Text Affected
BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

Headquarters:
Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg, New Delhi 110002
Telephones: 23230131,23233375,23239402
Website: www.bis.org.in
Regional Offices:
Telephones
Central
Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg

NEW DELHI 110002
Eastern
1114 C.I.T. Scheme VII M, V. 1. P. Road, Kankurgachi

KOLKATA 700054
2337 8499,2337 8561

{ 2337 8626, 2337 9120
Northern
SCO 335-336, Sector 34-A, CHANDIGARH 160022
603843
{ 609285
Southern
C.LT. Campus, IV Cross Road, CHENNAI 600113
2254 1216, 2254 1442

{ 22542519,22542315
Western
Manakalaya, E9 MIDC, Marol, Andheri (East)

MUMBAI 400093
2832 9295, 28327858

{ 28327891, 2832 7892
Branches:
AHMEDABAD. BANGALORE. BHOPAL. BHUBANESHWAR. COIMBATORE. DEHRADUN.

FARIDABAD. GHAZIABAD. GUWAHATI. HYDERABAD. JAIPUR. KOCHL LUCKNOW.
NAGPUR. PARWANOO. PATNA. PUNE. RAJKOT. VISAKHAPATNAM.
23237617
{ 2323 3841
published by BIS, New Delhi

Printed at: Bengal Offset Works, Karol Bagh, New Deihl.
,Ii
AMENDMENT NO. 1 JUNE 2001

TO
IS 456: 2000 PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE - CODE OF PRACTICE
( Fourth Revision)
(Page2,ForeWord, IlISt but one line) - Substitute 'ACI 318: 1995' for 'ACI319:
1989'.
(Page 11, clause 4 ) - Delete the matter 'Lw - Horizontal distance between centres
of\atemi restmlnt'.
(Page 15, clause 5.5, Title) - Substitute 'Chemical Admixtures' for 'Admixtures'.
(Page 17, clause 7.1 ) - Substitute the following for the existing informal table:
Placing Conditions
(1)
Blinding concrete;
Shallow sections;
Pavements using pavers
. Degree of
Workobility
Slump
(mm)
(2)
(3)
Very low
See7.! ••
Mass concrete;
'Lightly reinforced
sections in siabs,
Low
25-75
Medium
50-100
Medium
75-100
High
100 -150
Veryhigb
See7.1.l
Floots;
Hand placed pavement~;

Canal lining;
Strip footings
Heavily reinforced
sections in sis bs,
beams, wa1Js~ col~mns;
Slipfoim work;
Pumped concrete
]
)
Trench fill;
In-situ piling
Tremie concrete
NOTE - For most of tbe placing conditioDS, internal vibralors (needle vibrators)
are suitable. 'Tho 'diamelcr of the needle shall boo
determintld based on the density and spacing of reinforcement bars"and thickness of
sections. For tfernie concrete, vibrators arc not required
10 be used (sa.1so 13.3).
,,
.
(Page 19, Table 4, column 8, sub-heading) - Substitute 'F... ' for 'Fac»' .
( Page 27, clause 13.5.3 ) - Delete.
(Page 29, clouse 15.3 ):
a)
Substitute 'specimens' for 'samples' in lines 2, 6 and 7.
b) Substitute 'IS 9013' for 'IS 9103' .
(Page 29, clause 16.1 ) -- Substitute 'conditions' for 'condition' in line 3 and
the following matter for the existing
matter against '8)' :
'8) The mean strength determined from any group of four non-overlapping consecutive
test results complies with the
appropriate limits in column 2 of Table 11.'
.
..
(Page 29, clause 16,3,para 2) -Substitute 'col 3' for 'col 2'.
(Page 29, clause UA, line 2 ) - Substitute. '.16.1 or ~6,2 8slheca~emay be' for
'16.3'_
(Page 30, Table 11, column 3) -Substitute '~fc' - 3' for '~f.k-3, and '~f.. - 4'
for '~f..-4,
Price Group 3
1
Amend No.1 to IS 4S6: 1000

(Page 33, clause Zl.3, line 2) -Substitute 'action' for 'section'.
[Page 37, clause Z3.1.1(c) J- Substitute 'b,' for 'b, " '10' for '1.0', 'b' for 'b'
and 'bw' for 'bw' in the formulae.
(Page 46, clause 26.4.2) - Substitute '8.2.2' for '8.2.3'.
[Page 49, clause 26.5.3.2 (c) (2), laslline J-Subsiltute'6 mm' for '115 mm'.
(Page 62, clause 32.2.5 ) - Substitute
'H:: for 'H in Ihe explanation of e••

w,'
(Page 62, clause 32.3.1, line 4 ) - Substitute '32.4' for '32.3'.
! Page 62, clause 32.4.3 (b), line 6)- Insert '~.w· between the words 'but' and
'shall'.
(Page 65, clause 34.2.4.1(8), last line J- Insert the following after the words
'depth of footing' :
'in ca •• offootings on soils. and ata distance equal to half the effective depth
offooting'.
(Page 68, Table 18, col 4 ) - Substitute '-' for '1.0' against the Load Combination
DL +JL •
. (Page 72, clause 40.1 ) -Substitute 'btl' for 'b; in the formula.
(Page 83, clause D.4.3, line 2) - Delete tbe word 'and' •
(Page 85, clause D.S.S.l,para 2, line 6) - Substitute 'Table 24' for 'Table 23'.
(Page 85, clause D·S.Sol ) - Substitute the following for tbe e",ioling formula:
'A. '" a./> (t;,-2d 'to / av ) / (J.. 11: 0.4 a,b / 0.87 !., •
(Page 90, clause D.I.H, line 1 ) - Substitute 'Where' for 'Tonion·.
(Page 93. Fig. 27) - Substitute '1./1 • for 'IlL'.
(Page 95, Annex F):
a)
The reference to Fig. 28 given in column 1 of Ibe teXi along with Ibe explanation
oftbe symbols used in the Fig.
28 given thereafter may be read just before the formula given for the rectangular
tension zone.
.
.
b) Substitute 'compression' for 'compression' in Ihe explanation of symbol 'a •.

(Pages 98 to lOO.Annex H) - Substitute the follOWing for Ibe existing Annex:
ANNEX,H
(Foreword)
COMMI'ITEE COMPOSmON
Cement and Concrete Sectional Committee. CEO 2
M.mbet.
Chairman
DaH.C. VISVBSVAAAYA
'Chandrib', It 1Sth Crou,. 63-64 Easl Park Road,
Molteswaram, s..plore-S60003
R_ting .
DR S. C. AHWWAUA
OCL India Ltd, New Delhi
SHRI V. BAIASUDRAMANlAN
SHiu R. P. SINGH 01ler..,.)
Directorate General of Supplies and Disposals, New Delhi
SHRI O. R. BHA","","
B. O. Shirk. Construction Teclmololf Lid, PUIlO
SHRI A K. CHADHA
SURtS. R. SIL (Alk,nale)
Hlndustan pr.fab Umlted, New Deihl
CltlE. ENoINll.. (D..IO">
Central Public Works Depart...... New Delbl
SUP8RIN'I1lND1NO ENoINll.. (S&S) (Alk,nak)

CHm. J3N0JNBBR(NAVOAM DAII)
SUPJlIIJNIlNDINO ENoINllllR (QCC) (Aller",'e)
Sordar SaIOYlr Narmada Nipm Ltd. Oandhlnapr
CtoBF ENoINIIIlR (RBsI!A.RCH)-CUM·DlRBcToR

ReiIlARC" OI'l'\CBl\ (CoNCllBTB TocIlNOLOOY)
(AI'ernale)
lnigalion and Power Research Inslitule. Amrilllr
2
Amend No.1 to IS 456: 1000

( Continued from page 2 )
R~presentin8
Membus
SHRIJ. P. DmAi
SHruB. I'. JAOB11A (Alle,nale)
Gujarat Ambuja Coments Ltd. Ahmedabad
Dllw"""
A.P. Engine.rina Resenreb Laboralori.., Hyde,abad
D_(CMDD)(N&Wj
DIlPIIIY DllwC'lO. (CMDD) (NW&S) (Alternale)
Central Water Commission. New Delhi
SHRI I'. II. OANoWAL

SHRIV. PATfAn.. (AI"',""I<)
Hyderabad Industri.. Ltd, Hydernbad
SHRIV. I'. OHANlllW'
Structural Engineering Research Centre (CSIR). Ghaziabad
SHru S. OoPINA11I
TIle India Cemenls Ltd, Chenllai
SHruS. K. GUlfA 'JHAfCURTA
Gannon Dunkerley and Compan)! LuI, Mumbai
JOINI' DiRllClllR (A11""""o)
SHRIR. TAMD..AICARAN (AI",,..,.)
SIIRlS. SANKARANARAYANAN (Allernal.)
Central Building Research Institute (<:SIR). Roorkee.
SUIU N. S. SllAL
DRlRsilAD MAsOOD (Alter...",) "

PRoP A. K. JAIN
Univt'.rsity of Roorkee, Roorkee
SHIU N. C. JAIN
Cement Corporation of India Ltd. New Delhi

JOINT D1I1OCTOR (STANDARDS)(B&S) (CB-l)
JOIN. DIRllCIllR(STANOAROS) (8&S) (CE-!!)
Research, Designs & Standards Organization (Ministry of Railways), ~
(AU.-te)
SHIU N. G. Jos..
SHRIP. D. KIlU<AR (AIter""te)
The' Indian Hurne Pipe Company Ltd. Mumbai
SlIru D. I'. KANt1Noo
National Test House. Calcutta
SIIRlS. R. _
(AU.,,,.te)
Smu P. KJw;HNAMUR1HY
Larsen & Tubro lAd, Mumbai
SIIIU S. CHoWDIIURY (AU.....",)
DltA. G. MAOHAVARAo
SIIR! I'. MAN! (AU"""",)
Structural Engineering Research Centr. (CSIR~ <lIen..i
5"",1. SARUP
Hospital Services Consultancy Corporation (India) LId, New Delhi
Smu V. SURl5H
Housing and Urban Development Corporation Ltd. New Delhi
SHRID. P. SINOII (Allernate)

Sum PAAFFULA KUMAR
SIIIU P. P. NAII\ VlI",...,.)
Ministry of Surface Transport. Department of Surfaoc Transport (Roads Winl>t ~

Delbi
MEMBER SOCRBfARY
DII...:IOR(CML)(AU......te)
Central Boatd of Irrigation & Power, New Delhi
SIIIU S. I'. NAfI1lANI

DRA. S. QoIll.(AU......te)
Engineerwin-Chiefs Branch. Army Headquarters. New Delhi
SIllU S. S. SIlIlHRA
SHRI SATANOIlR KuMAR (Alternate)
Central Road Research lnstltulo (CSIR), New DeIhl

SHRIY. R. \'HULL
Indian Roads Congress, New Delhi
DRC. RAJKVMAR
DR I'. MOIIAN (Alt......,.)
National Council for Cement and Building Materials, Ballabpr~
SIIR! S. A. REDDI
Gammon Iodi.8l.Jd, Mumbai
RI'IRBS_A1M!
Bui1de~'s Assoclation oflndia, Mumbai
8HRII. S. SANOANSIIIU L N. MARWAL(AltentlJl.)
Geological Survey 01 India. Celcutla
S~INO
Public Works Deportmen~ Government 01 Tamil Nad", a..nnai
Slim A. I'. SHARMA (AU- te)
p...,..- (DIlsI<lll)
IlxiIcuTM!E/OJINBIlR(SMR DMStON) (AI,.....,.) ".
SHRIK. I'. TAPARIA

SHmA. K.J... (AI,.....,.)
Indian Rayon and industries Lid, Pune
SHRIT.N. TIWARI
DRD. GHOSH (Aile,.",.)
~ Associated Cement C:ompanies ~ Mumbai
DRK. VENKATAQl.Al.AM
Cenlra~.Soli and _Materials Research Stalim, New Delhi
SHIUN. CHANoRASa<ARAN(AII.,.",.)
3
( Continued <Nt pase 4 )
Amend No.1 10 IS 456: 2000

(Continued from page 3 )
M"",b<rs
Represmting
DRH. C. VrsVllSVARAYA
SHRID. C. CHA'I'llRVI'llI(Ah<rna/e)
The Institution ofEnginee1S (India), Calcutta
Slim VINOD KUMAR

Di""'lor (Clv EoW
Director General, BIS (&-officio Member)
M eml¥r-Secl'd4rieJ
SIIRI 1. K. PRAsAD
AddilioDaI Dlre<lOr (Clv Bogs), BIS
SUR,SANJAY PANT
Depuly Di'UlOr (Clv Engg~ BIS
Concrete Subcommittee, CED2:2

Convener
DR A. K. MUWCK
Represenl;98
National Council for Cement and Building Materials, Baltabgarh
Members
SIIIUC. R. AuMCIlANDAfoll
SURIS. RANoAkAJAN (AUer..te)
Slup Consultanrs Ltd, Mumbai
DR P. C. OIOWDUURY
D. C. S. VISIIWANADIA(Alt.,nate)
Torsteel Research Foundation in India, CalcuUa
SURlI. P.DESAI
sHIn B. K. ]AolITtA.(AI'....te)
Gujaral Ambuja Cements Ltd, Ahmedabad
DIRECIOR
Slim N. CHANDIlASIlKARAN (Alter""te)
Central Soil and Materials Research Station, NClw ~lhi
DIRECIOR (c&MDD)
DBPI1IY DIRI!C'IOR (C&MDD) (Alternate)
Central Water Commission, ~ew Delhi
JOINT DuulcroRSTANDAIUlS(B&S),CB-II
JOINT DIRIlC'IOR STAND.""" (B&S)lCB-1
(Alter..te)
R~tch, Designs and Standards Organization ( Ministry of Railways), Lucbow,
SVPIIRINlENDING EN'GlNBBR (DmJONS)

ExOClNlVll ENGINEER (DIlSIGNS).1II (Alternale)
Central Public Works Departmenl, New Delhi
SURIV. K_GI\ANllKAR
SIIIU D. S. PI\AKASII RAo (Alternate)
Structural Engineering Research Centre (CSIR), Ghazlabad
8m1S. K. GllHA'I'HAKURTA
Gannon Dunkerley and Co LId, Mumbai
SIIRJS_ P. SANKARANAllAVANAN(Alt.,..te)
SIllU] • S. !IINOORAJII
Associated Consulting Services, Mumbai
SIIIU L K. JAIN
. rD personal capacil)'
SURJ M. P. JAISINOH
Cenlr.1 Building ResearcllIDSIIIuI.(CSIR~ Roorbe
DR B.IV.MESWAllARAo(Alterna'e)
CHlBf ENOlNBnR& JOINT SBCRBTARY
Surl!JtlN'mNOINO ENoJNl!BR (Alternate)
Public Works DepartmeD~ Mumbal
PROF S. KRISHNA Moo.mv

SIIIUK. K. NAVAR (Alternate)
Indian Institute of Technology, New Delhi
D.S.C.MAm
Nalional Council for Cement and Building Materials, Ballabprh
MANAOINDDIRIlC'fOa
Hindustan Prefab Limited. New Delhi
SIIIU M. KUNDu (Alterna/e)

SIIIUS. K. NAmIANI
LT-COL K. S. Ciww< (Alternate)
Engil»tl-in-Chief 's BraBCb, Army Headqua.rt~- New DeIhl
SIIIUB. V. B- PAl
SIIIU M. G. DANDVA11I (Alternate)
The Associated Cement Companies Ltd, Mumbai
SHRJ A B- I'IIADKB
SIIIU D. M. SAVIJR (Alternate)
The"Hindustan CoDSlntction Co Ltd, Mumbai
SIIIU Y. R. ptllJlL
Se.RJ S. S. SEBHIIA (Alternate I)
Cen"al Road Research Inslilole (CSIR). New Delhi
SIIRJ SATANDB. KUMAR (Alternate II)
4
Amend No.1 to IS 456 : 2000

( Contillued from pagt! 4 )
Members
Representing
SIIRI A. S. PRASAD RAo
Structural Engineering Research Centre (<::SIR). Chemlai
Stull K. MANI(AIlt!fIJ14/t!)
Smu K. L. PRlnlt1
SIIRIJ. R. GAHRlu,(Alternate)
National Building Construclion Corporation Ud. New Delhi
SIUU B. D. RAHAI...KER
Nucleal' Power Corporation, Mllmbai
Smu U. S. P. VIlRMA (AlterlUlle)

SURI llANUMAN'D-IA RAo
SmuG. RAMAKJUSiiNAN (Ailernate)
SIIRI S. A. REoD!
AP. Engineering Research Laboratories. llydcrabad

Gammon India Ud, Mumbai
DII. N. K. NAYAK(Allernate)
SUIU S. C. SAWHNEV
Enginr..ers India lJd. New Delhi
SltluR. P. MBlIR011lA(AlterlUlle)
PlwFM. S. SHH'nY
Indian Concrete Institute, Chennai
SIIRI N. K. SINHA
Ministry of Surface Transport (Roads Wing), New Delhi
Smull. T. UNWAU.A
In personal capacily
P.nrJ for Revision 01' IS 456, CED 2:2/P

Represt'.Jllill8
Oil C. RAlKUMAR
NatiQ~al Council for Cement and Building Malerials. BaUabgarll

Memln:rs
DR A.~IL KUMAR
National Council [or Cement and Building Materials. Ballabgarh
SIIRIV. K. GllANt1KAR
Structural Engineering Research Centre «('SIR). Ghaziabad
PROf A. K. JAIN
University of Roorkec, Roorkce
SIIRI L. K. JAIN
In personal capacity
SmuJOSi! KURIAN
Central Public Works Departmenl, New Delbi
DIlS.C.MArn
National Council for Cement and Building Materials, Bal1abgarh
DR A. K. MrrrAL
Central Public Works Department. New Delhi
SHRIS. A. REuDi
DRV. 'fUIRUVENODAM
School o[ Planning and Architecture, New Delhi
Special Ad-Hoc Group for Revision of IS 456

Convener
DR II. C. VISVI3SVARAYA
th
'Chandrika', at 15 Cross., 63-64 East Park Road.

Mallcswaram, Bangalore-560003
Members
Represellli"tl
DR C. RAlKuMAR
NaiionalCouncil for Cement and Building Materials, Bal1abgarh
SIUU S. A. RBDDI
(CED2)
5
AMENDMENT NO. 2 SEPTEMBER 2005

TO
IS 456: 2000
PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETECODE OF PRACTICE

( Fourth Revision)
( Page 13, clause 5.2.1.1, line 1 ) 'Grade 1 oflS 3812'.
Substitute 'IS 3812 (Part 1)' for
( Page 13, clause 5.2.1.2 and corresponding Note) following for the existing:
Substitute the
'Silica fume conforming to IS 15388 may be used as part replacement of cement

provided lUliform blending with the cement is ensured.
NOTE- Silica fume is usual1y used in proportion of .5 to-tO percent of the cement
content of a mix.'
(Page 13, Note under clause 5.2.1.3, line 5 ) -
Substitute 'be' for 'range
It'om being' .
(Page 25, clause 10.3.3, line 4 )-Delete the word 'and'.

(Page 65, clause 34.2.4.2, line 1 ) - Substitute 'on' for 'or'.
l Page 65, clause 34.3.1(a), line 2 1- Delete the words 'extending in each
direction' .
(Page 66, clause 34.4.3, line 5 ) -
Substitute 'not' for 'no'.
( Page 78, Annex A ) - Substitute the following for the existing entries for
IS 3812 : 1981:
'[SNo.
Title
IS 3812 (Part I) : 2003
SpeCification for pulverized fuel ash : Part 1 For

use as pozzolana in cement, cement mortar and
concrete (second revision)'
( Page 79, Annex A ) -
Add the following at the end:
'[SNo,
Tit/e
IS 15388 : 2003
Specification for silica fume'
1
Amend No. 2 to IS 456 : 2000

( Page 80, B-2.I.I, InJormal table) - Insert the following in the table:
,MS5
5.6
--,
(Page 81, Table 21 )-Insertthefollowing row after the last row:
'(I)
(2)
(3)
(4)
MSS
17.5
13.0
1.5'
( Page 91, Table 26, Case No.2, col 2 ) .-- Substitute 'On. Short Edge
Discontinuous t for ~One ShQrt Edge Continuous'.
[ Page 96, G-l.1(c),jormu/a J - Substitute' Mu,lm.' Jar' M,,·,m.'.
[Page 96, G-l.l(d), last line]- Substitute '38.1' Jor '39.1 '.
(CED2)
2
AMENDMENT NO.3 AUGUST 2007

TO
IS 456 : 2000 PLAIN AND REINFORCED
CONCRETE - CODE OF PRACTICE
( Fourtll Revision)
.
(Page 2, F orev.;ord) -
Insert the following after para 8:
'The provisions for Self Compacting Concrete have been included for guidance
(slie Annex J). '
.
(Page 10) -Add thefollowing atthe end:
'ANNEX.J SELF COMPACTING CONCRETE'

(Page 15, clause 5.4.4, last ;ente~ce) - Delete.
0,
(Page \5, c/ause5 ..6.2) - Addthe foll~wing at the end:
'Reduction in design bond strength ofcaated bars shall be looked into.'

(Page '15, c/a~se 5.6.3) - Add the follo~in~ after the clause and renumber
the existing c1au.sc'5.7' as '5.8'.
'5.7 Fibres
Fibres may be added to con~rete for special applicati~ns to enhance properties,
for whichspedalist Iiteratur~ may be. referred.t!'.'
(Page) 5, clause 6.1.3k- Substitute the following for the existing clause:
'Concrete of grades lower than those given in Table 5 may be used for lean
concrete, foundation for' masonry walls Of tempOrary reinforced' concrete
construction. '
.,:
[Page 17, clause 7.1 (see also Ainendment No.1)] delete the words' fn-situ piling'
in column 1.
In the inform.liable,
Amend No.3 to IS 456 : 2000
(Page 23, Table 9) following 'NOTE 2':
Number the existing note as 'NOTE I' and add the'
'NOTE 2 - Quantity of water required from durability point of view may be less than
the value given
above:
(Page 29, clause 15.1.1, last line) -
Add 'in accordance with 16' at the
end.
(Page 42, clause 26.1.1) - Add the following althe end:

'Congestion of reinforcement should be avoided during detailing. Various
methods such as choosing the diameter and grade of steel carefully'and bundling
of reinforcement, if required, are available. '
[Page 45, clause 26.2.5.1(a)]- Substitute the following for the existing:
'Lap splices shall noi be used for bars larger than 32 mm. Bars larger than
32 mm shall be welded (see 12.4) or mechanically spliced.'
[Page 46,clause 26.3.3(bX2), laslline]- Substitute ',300 mm' for '450 mm'.
[Page 47, clause 26.S.I.I(b») -'" Add the following note at the ,md:
'NOTE - The usc. of 4 percent reinforcement may involve practical ditTrculty in
placing and
compactiflg concrete; hence lower percentage is recommended.'
,
(Page 47; clause 26.5.1.2) - Add the following note at the end:
•NOTE - The use of 4 percent reinforcement may involve practical difficulty in
placing and
compacting of co_nerete; hence lower percentage Is recommended,.'
(Page 52, clause 29.3.4, las/ line) - Substitute '32.5' jor '32.4'.
(Page 100, Annex H) - Add the following annex:
2
Amend No. 3 to IS 456 : 2000
ANNEXJ
(Foreword)
SELF COMPACTING CONCRETE
J-t GENERAL
Self compacting concrete is a concrete that fills uniformly and completely every·
corner of formwork by its own weight without application of any vibration,
without segregation, whilst maintaining homogeneity.
J-2 APPLICATION AREA

Self compacting concrete may be used in precast concrete applications or for
concrete placed on site. It may be manufactured in a site batching plant or in a
ready-mixed concrele plant and delivered to site by truck mixer. It may then be
placed either by pumping or pouring into horizontal or vertical forms.
J-3 FEATURES OF FRESH SELF COMPACTING CONCRETE
The following are some oflbe features of self compacting concrete:
a)
Slump flow: 600 mm, Min.
b) Sufficient amount of fines « 0.125 mm) preferably in the ra\1ge of

400 kglm' to 600 kgtm'. This can be achieved by having sand content
more than 38 percent and using mineral admixture to the order of 25
percent to 50 percent by mass of cementi!ious materials.
c)
Use of high range water reducing (HRWR) admixture and viscosity

modifying agent (VMA) in appropriate dosages.
(CED2)
3
AMENDMENT NO.4 MAY 2013

TO
IS 456 : 2000 PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE - CODE OF PRACTICE
(Fourth Revision)
(Page 14, clause 5.3, second sentence) - Delete.
(Page 14, clause 5.3.4, second sentence) - Delete.
(Page 14, clause 5.4, line 1) - Substitute 'Water, natural or treated,' for
'Water'.
(Page 14, clause 5.4.3,jirst sentence) -
Snbstitute the following for the existing sentellce:
'Sea water shall not be used for mixing or curing of concrete because of presence
of harmful salts.'
(page IS, clause 5.5.6) - Insert the following new clause:
'5.5.7 The amount of admixture added to a mix shall be recorded in the production
record. Redosing of
admixtures is not normally permitted. In special circumstances, if necessary,
additional dose of admixture may
be added at project site and mixed adequately in mixer itself to regain the
workability of concrete with the
mutual agreement between the prodncer/suppJier and the purchaser/user of concrete.
However, the
producer/supplier shall assure the ultimate quality of concrete supplied by him and
maintain record of
quantity and time of addition.'
(Page 16, Table 2) - Substitute the following table for the existing table:
. Table 2 Grades of Concrete

(C/auses 6.1,9.2.2,15.1.1 and36.1)
Group
Designation
Specified Characteristic CompreSsive Strength of

150 mm Cube at 28 days
N/min2
(1)
.. (2)
(3)
Ordinary Concrete
M 10
'M 15
M20
10
15
20
Grade
M25
25
M30
30
35
40
45
M35
Standard Concrete
M40
M45
M50
50
55
M55
M60
60
M65
M70
. High Strength Concrete
.65
,70
M75
M80
80
M85
M90
90
M95
. M 100
95
100
75
85
NOTES
lin the designation of concrete mix M refers to the mix and the number to the
specified characteristic compressive
strength of 150 nun size cube at 28 days. expressed, in N/mm2 . ·
.
2 For concrete of grades above M 60, design parameters given in the standard may
not be applicable and the values
may be obtained from specialized literatures and experimental results.
Price Group 3
..
. :.
Amendment No.4 to IS 456 : 2000
(Page 17, c!a"se 8.1,Jine 3) -
Insert the W9rd 'life' after 'service',
(Page 20, Table 5, Note I) - Substitute ti,e following for the existing note:
'1 Cement content prescribed in this table is irrespective of grades and types of
cement and is inclusive of mineral admixtures mentioned in
5.2, The mineral admixtures such as fly ash 01' ground granulated blnst furnace
slag shall be taken intO' account in the concrete composition
with respect to the cement content and water-cement ratio not exceeding the limit
of fly ash and slag specified in IS 1489 (Part 1) and IS 455
respectively, beyond which these additions, though permitted. shall not be
considered fo.1' these purposes.'
(Page 20, Table 5, No/e2) - Insert the following new note:

'3 The minimum cement content, maximul11 free wa!cr"cel11~nl ratio and mil1im~un
grade pr conc~ete are in~ivjdt!ally related to exposlIre.'
[Page 21, clause 8.2.5.4 (b), para 2] - Substitute 'fly ash confonning.to IS 3812
(Parl I) or ground
granulated' for 'fly ash (Grade I) conforming to IS 3812 or granulated' and '25
percent' for '20 percent',
(Page 21, clause 8.2.6.2,para 2) - Substitute the following for the existing para:
'Additional protection may 'be obtained by the use of suitable impermeable
barriers,'
(Page 22, clause 9.2.1) - Insert the following at the end:

'If so desired, the employer shall be provided with supporting data including
graphs showing strength versus
water-cement ratio for range of proportions, complete trial mix propOliioning
details to substantiate the choice
of cement content, fine and coarse aggregate content,_ watel',_,mineral admixtures,

chemical admixtures, etc.'
(Page 22, clause 9.2.2,jirsl sentence) ~ Insert the f6110wing'after first sentence:
'Proportion/grading of aggre~ates shan be made by trial in such a way a,s to make
densest possible concrete.'
(Page 23, Table 8) ~ SubstitUte the following for the existingtable:'

Table 8 Assumed Standard Deviation
(Clause 9.2.4.2 and Table 11)
Grade of Concrete
Assumed Standard Deviation

N/mm 2
MlO
MI5
3.5
M20
M25
4,0
M30
M35
M40
M45
M50
M35
M60
5,0
!"
NOTES
1 The above values correspond to the site control having proper stomge of cement;
weigh batching of all materials; controlled addition of
water; regular checking of all materials, aggregate grading and moisture content;
'and periodical checking of workability and strength.
Where there is deviation from the above, the values given in the above table shall
be increased by 1 N/mm2,
2 For grades above M 60, the standard deviation shall be established by actual
trials based on assumed proportions, before finalizing the
mix.
'" .
2
AmendineritNo. 4 to IS 456 : 2000

(Page 24, clause 10.2,para 2) -
Substitute the following for the existing para:
'For large and medium project sites, the concrete shall be sourced from ready-mixed
concrete plants or from
captive on-site or off-site automatic batching and mixing plants. The concrete
produced and supplied by readymixed concrete plants shall be in accordance with IS
4926. In case of concrete from captive on-site or off-site
automatic batching and mixing plants, similar quality control shall be followed.'
(Page 24, clause 10.2.t,first sentence) - Substitute the following for the existing
sentence:
'The grading of aggregate shall be controlled by obtaining the coarse aggregate in
different sizes and blending
them in right proportions, the different sizes being stockedin separate stock-
piles.'
(Page 24, clause 10.2.2) - Substitute the following for the existing clause:
'10.2.2 The accuracy of the measuring equipment shall be within ±2 percent of the
quantity of cement and
mineral admixtures being measured and within ±3 percent of the quantity of
aggregate, chemical admixtures and
water being measured. In a batching plant, the concrete production equipment shall
be calibrated initially at the
time of installation or reconditioning of the equipment and subsequently at the
following intervals:
a) Mechanical! knife edge systems: At least once every two months
b) Electrical/ load cell systems
: At least once every three months' ..
'10.2.3 All ingredients of concrete shall be used by mass except water and chemical
admixtures, which may be
by volume.'
..
(Page 24, clause 10.2.5,jourth sentence) - Insert the follpwing after fourth
sentence:
'Where batching plants are used, it is recommended to determine moisture content by
moisture probes fitted to
the hatching plants.'
(Page 24,clause 10.3,firstand second sentence) - Snbstitute the following for the
existing sentences:
'Concrete shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer (see also IS 1791 and IS 12119). it
'shall be ensured that
stationary or central mixers and truck mixers shall comply with the performance
criteria of mixing efficiency as
per IS 4634. Mixing efficiency test shall be performed at least once in a year.'
'10.3.1 As a guidance, the mixing time shall be at least 2 min for conventional
free fall (drum) batch type
concrete mixers. For other types of more efficient mixers, manufacturers'
recommendations Shall he followed.'
(page 25, clause 10.3.3) - Substitute the following for the existing clause: .
'10.3.3 Dosages of retarders, plasticizers and superplasticizers shall be

restricted toO.5;1.0 and 2.0 percent
respectively hy mass of cementitious materials; however, the dosages of
polycarboxybite based admixtures shall
not exceed 1.0 percent. A higher value of above admixtures may be used, if agreed
upon between the
manufacturer and the constructor based On performance tests relating to
workahility, setting time and early age
strength. '
3
Amendment NO'c 4 tdS 4:;6.: 20~P

(Page 25, clause 11.1, informal table) -"-'- Sl!bstitut~ .tbe·followingJor
tbeexistingtable:
a) Deviation from specified dimensions
ofcrpss;",sec.tion ofcolu~s and
beams
+10
.-'S'nnl
b) Deviation from dimensions of

footings:
1) Dimensions in
+50
plan
2) Eccentricity
_lO illill
0.02timestbe width oftbe footing in the

direction of deviation but not more than 50
mm
3) Thickness
+50
, _lO mm
, or
± 0.05 times the specified thickness,
whichever is less
(Page 27, clause 13.4, para I ,fourth sentence) - Delete.

[Page 30, Table 11 (see alsp Ame'ldments No .. I and 3)] Table II:
Su~stitute the. following for the existing
Table 11 Ch~r~cteristic Compressive Strength CompIianceRequirement

(Clauses 16.1 and 16.3)
Mean of the'Group oN Non-Overlap~ing Consecutive Test .
Results in N/mm
Specified
Grade
,,\:
Min
Individual Test
Results iu N/mm'
Min
(2)
(3)
'
(I)
.", lek + O.825x established standard deviation·
MIS and
above
"'fok. - 3 Nlmm'
(rounded off to nearest 0.5. N/mm2)

or
fok. + 3 N/mm2 ,
whichever is grellter
. NQ11!S
1.. Irl' t1ie absende-ofestablished value ofstanoard:deviatioll;-,the.-values given
in Table 8 maybe assumed, and attempt should be
made to obtain results of 30 samples as early as possible to establish the value of
standard deviation.
2 For concrete of quantity up to 30 m 3 (where the number of samples to be taken is
less thmi four as pel' the frequency of sampling
given in 15.2.2), the mean of test results of all such samples shall be 10k + 4
NJmm2, minimum mId the requirement of minimum
indi~idual test-Jesults shall bej~:::_.~ ~Jn~1112,lnipi.mum ..l!0wever. when the
number .of samp.l~ is onJy one as per .15.2.2, the
requirement sha!l be jflk + 4 NJmm , mm1!llum. "
".
. -
. ' I;,,)
';
.:,
'.
[Page41, a/ause 24A.l(an~ Substitute'lhe'[oilowingforthe existing:·

'a) Calculate tbe sum of the midspan moment and the average of tbe support moments
(neglecting signs) for
each panel. '
(page 42, clause 26.2.1, Note 2) - Insert the following new note:
'3 For plain cement concrete ofMI5 grade with nominal reinforcement, the design
bond stress may be taken as 1.0 N/mm2
> ,
Amendment No.4 to IS 456: 2000
(page 43, clause 26.2.1.1, para 2) - Insert the following at the end of para:
'For fusion bonded epoxy coated deformed bars, design bond stress values shall be
taken as 80 percent of the
values given in the above table.'
(Page 67, clause 35.3.2, last para, third sentence) -
Substitnte the following for the existing sentence:
'For particularly aggressive environment, such as 'very severe' and 'extreme'

categories given in Table 3, the
assessed surface width of cracks should not in general, exceed 0.1 mm.'
(Page 74, clause 40.5.2,formula) -
Substitute, ':EA,; for 'A,' in the formula.
[Page 80, clause B-2.1.1, informal table (see also Amendment No. 2)]- Substitute
M 50 and above
M50 M 55
for
5.2
5.2
[Page 81, Table 21 (see also Amendment No.2)] for M 60, as follows:
Grade of·
Concrete
(1)
M55
M60
5.6
Substitute the entries against M 5S and insert new row
Permissible Stress in Compression
(Page 92, clause E-l, line 5) -
Direc;'l
(3)
(2)
18.0
20.0
13.5
15.0
Substitute 'Fig. 27' for 'Fig. 26'.
(CED 2)
Permissible Stress in
Bond (Average) for
Plain Bars in Tension
(4)
.
1.5
1.6
AMENDMENT NO. 5 JULY 2019

TO
IS 456 : 2000 PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE —
CODE OF PRACTICE
(Fourth Revision)
[Page13, clause 5.1 (a)] — Substitute the following for the existing:
‘a) Ordinary Portland Cement conforming to IS 269’
[Page 13, clause 5.1 (b) and (c)] — Delete.
(Page 13, clause 5.2) — Insert the following after the title:
‘Mineral admixtures listed below may be used along with ordinary Portland
cement. Uniform blending of the mineral admixtures with the cement should be
ensured.’
(Page 13, clause 5.2.1) — Substitute the following for the existing clause:
‘5.2.1 Pozzolanas
Pozzolanic materials, as given below, may be used.’
(Page 13, clause 5.2.1.1, line 3) — Delete the following:
‘provided uniform blending with cement is ensured’
[Page 13, clause 5.2.1.2 (see also Amendment No. 2)] — Delete the
following:
‘provided uniform blending with the cement is ensured’
(Page 13, clause 5.2.1.4) — Substitute the following for the existing
clause:
Price Group 2
1
Amendment No. 5 to IS 456 : 2000
‘5.2.1.4 Metakaolin
Metakaolin conforming to IS 16354 may be used as part replacement of
ordinary Portland cement.’
(Page 13, clause 5.2.2) — Substitute the following for the existing clause:
‘5.2.2 Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag
Ground granulated blast furnace slag conforming to IS 16714 may be used as
part replacement of ordinary Portland cement.’
(Page 14, clause 5.2.2) — Insert the following new clause:
‘5.2.3 Precautions
5.2.3.1 For concrete made with mineral admixtures, the setting time and rate of
gain of strength may be different from those of concrete made with ordinary
Portland cement alone. Cognizance of such modified properties shall be taken
into account in deciding de-shuttering time, rate of movement of formwork in
slipform construction, initial time of prestressing, longer curing period and for
early age loading. The compatibility of chemical admixtures and cementitious
materials should be ensured by trials.
5.2.3.2 Concrete containing mineral admixtures may exhibit an increase in
plastic shrinkage cracking because of its low bleeding characteristics. The
problem may be avoided by ensuring that such concrete is protected against
drying, both during and after finishing.
5.2.3.3 Some other properties of concrete such as modulus of elasticity, tensile
strength, creep and shrinkage are not likely to be significantly different. For
design purposes, it will be sufficiently accurate to adopt the same values as
those used for concrete made with ordinary Portland cement alone.
5.2.3.4 Mixes that contain very fine mineral admixtures such as silica fume, can
be sticky and difficult to finish.
5.2.3.5 Concrete made using blended cements such as Portland pozzolana
cement and Portland slag cement shall also adhere to 5.2.3.1, 5.2.3.2 and
5.2.3.3.’
2
(Page 14, clause 5.3, line 1) — Insert, ‘derived from natural sources and
from other than natural sources,’ after ‘Aggregates’.
(Page 17, clause 8.1.1, para 3, first sentence) — Insert the following after
first sentence:
‘Maintenance plays an important role in sustained durability of concrete (see
also 10.1).’
(Page 19, Table 4, Note 4) — Substitute the following for the existing:
‘4 The cement contents given in col 7 of this table are the minimum recommended.
For SO3 contents
near the upper limit of any class, cement contents above these minimum are advised.
For the
purpose of calculation of SO3 content (if the test results are in the form of SO4,
the following
relation shall be used: SO3 = 0.833 SO4.’
(Page 20, clause 8.2.5.3, line 6) — Insert ‘(where SO3 = 0.833 SO4)’ after
‘SO3’.
[Page 20, clause 8.2.5.4, para 2, (b)] — Substitute the following for the
existing:
‘b) Use of low alkali ordinary Portland cement having total alkali content
not more than 0.6 percent [as Na2O equivalent (expressed as Na2O +
0.658 K2O)].
Further advantage can be obtained by use offly ash conforming to
IS 3812 (Part 1) or ground granulated blast furnace slag conforming to
IS 16714 as part replacement of ordinary Portland cement [having total
alkali content as Na2O equivalent (expressed as Na2O + 0.658 K2O) not
more than 0.6 percent], provided fly ash content is at least 25 percent
or slag content is at least 50 percent.’
(Page 25, clause 11.3.1, line 4) — Delete the following:
‘and where ordinary Portland cement is used and adequate curing is done’
3
(Page 25, clause 11.3.1, informal table) — Substitute the following for the
existing table:
Sl
No.
Type of Formwork
Minimum Period Before Striking Formwork

For Concrete
Made Using
OPC
(1)
(2)
(3)
For Concrete Made

Using Cement Other than
OPC or Using Mineral
Admixtures Like Fly Ash
and Slag
(4)
i)
Vertical formwork to columns, walls,

beams
16-24 h
16-24 h
ii)
Soffit formwork to slabs (Props to be

refixed immediately after removal of
formwork)
3 days
7 days
iii)
Soffit formwork to beams (Props to be

refixed immediately after removal of
formwork)
7 days
10 days
iv)
Props to slabs:
1) Spanning up to 4.5 m
2) Spanning over 4.5 m
7 days
14 days
10 days
14 days
v)
Props to beams and arches:

1) Spanning up to 6 m
2) Spanning over 6 m
14 days
21 days
14 days
21 days
NOTE — Utmost care shall be taken to provide props. The props shall be provided
immediately after stripping each shuttering panel and not after stripping all the
panels
of the entire slab.
(Page 25, clause 11.3.1, last sentence) — Delete the words ‘other cements
and’.
(Page 25, clause 11.3.1) — Insert the following new clause:
‘11.3.1.1 In case of use of cements other than OPC or in case of use of mineral
admixtures like fly ash and slag, in lieu of the minimum period specified in
11.3.1 col 3, the stripping of formwork may be done in accordance with the
provisions of 11.3.1 col 2, provided concrete cube testing is done to ensure that
the following minimum strength is achieved:
4
a) 3 days
45 percent of specified strength
b) 7 days
c) 14 days
(Page 26, clause 13.3.1, sentence one) — Substitute the following for the
existing:
‘Concrete shall be compacted using mechanical vibrators complying with
IS 2505, IS 2506 and IS 2514.’
(Page 33, clause 21.1, sentence four) — Substitute the following for the
existing sentence:
‘Essential requirements of fire safety of buildings with respect to details of
construction are given in IS 1642.’
[Page 45, clause 26.2.5.1 (g)] — Insert the following para at the end:
‘Reinforcement couplers for mechanical splices of bars for concrete
reinforcement, used, shall be in accordance with IS 16172.’
(Page 72, clause 40.2.3.1) — Substitute the following for the existing:
‘40.2.3.1 For solid slabs, the nominal shear stress shall not exceed half the
appropriate values given in Table 20.
Maximum shear stress, τ c max given in Table 20 is valid for all load cases
including earthquake except the following:
a) For coupling beams in coupled shear walls, under earthquake forces,
the limiting value of τ c max given in Table 20 shall be superseded
by 10 of IS 13920 : 2016.
b) Coupled shear walls shall be connected by ductile coupling beams.

If the earthquake induced shear stress in the coupling beam exceeds,
0.1ℓs �𝑓𝑓ck
𝐷𝐷
5
where ℓs is the clear span of the coupling beam and D is its overall
depth, the entire earth quake induced shear and flexure shall,
preferably, be resisted by diagonal reinforcement.
The area of reinforcement to be provided along each diagonal in a
diagonally reinforced coupling beam shall be,
𝐴𝐴sd =
𝑉𝑉u
1.74𝑓𝑓y sin 𝛼𝛼
where Vu is the factored shear force and α is the angle made by the
diagonal reinforcement with the horizontal. At least 4 bars of 8mm
diameter shall be provided along each diagonal. The reinforcement
along each diagonal shall be enclosed by special confining
reinforcement, as per 8 of IS 13920 : 2016. The pitch of spiral or
spacing of ties shall not exceed 100 mm.
The diagonal or horizontal bars of a coupling beam shall be anchored
in the adjacent walls with an anchorage length of 1.5 times the
development length in tension.’
(Page 77, Annex A) — Substitute the following for the existing entries
against concerned Indian Standards:
IS No.
269 : 2015
383 : 2016
455 : 2015
875 (Part 3) : 2015
1489
(Part 1) : 2015
(Part 2) : 2015
1641 : 2013
Title
Ordinary Portland cement — Specification (sixth
revision)
Coarse and fine aggregate for concrete —
Specification (third revision)
Portland slag cement — Specification (fifth
revision)
Wind loads (third revision)
Portland Pozzolana cement — Specification
Fly ash based (fourth revision)
Calcined clay based (fourth revision)
Code of Practice for fire safety of buildings
(general) : General principles of fire grading and
classification (second revision)
6
IS No.
1642 : 2013
1786 : 2008
3812 (Part 1) :
2013
6006 : 2014
13920 : 2016
14268 : 2017
Title
Fire safety of buildings (general) : Details of
construction — Code of Practice (second revision)
High strength deformed steel bars and wires for
concrete reinforcement — Specification (fourth
revision)
Pulverized fuel ash: Part 1 For use as pozzolana in
cement, cement mortar and concrete (third revision)
Uncoated stress relieved strand for Pestressed
concrete — Specification (second revision)
Ductile design and detailing of reinforced concrete
structures subjected to seismic forces — Code of
Practice (first revision)
Uncoated stress relieved low relaxation seven-wire
(Ply) strand for prestressed concrete — Specification
(first revision)’
[Page 78, Annex A, entries pertaining to ‘IS 4656 : 1968’, ‘IS 8112 : 1989’,
‘IS 12089 : 1987’ and ‘IS 12269 : 1987’] — Delete.
(Page 79, Annex A) — Insert the following new entries at the end:
‘IS No.
16172 : 2014
16354 : 2015
16714: 2018
Title
Reinforcement couplers for mechanical splices of
bars for concrete reinforcement — Specification
Metakaolin for use in cement, cement mortar and
concrete — Specification
Ground granulated blast furnace slag for use in
cement, mortar and concrete —Specification’
(CED 02)
Publication Unit, BIS, New Delhi, India

IS 456 With All Ammendments

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IS 456 With All Ammendments

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

IS 456 With All Ammendments

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Free Standard provided by BIS via BSB Edge Private Limited to Vivek Sharma

Allahabad(Vivanbhatt1234@gmail.com) 47.15.230.182 [for non-commercial use only].

fllJOOIl'""""'I ~ SI~r<.1d 61'i9012 -

PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE CODE OF PRACTICE

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

The significant changes incorpDrated in SectiDn 3 are as fDIlDWS:

Requirements fDr 'Fire Resistance' have been further detailed.

RecDmmendatiDns regarding effective length .of cantilever have been added.

RecommendatiDns regarding deflection due tD lateral IDads have been added.

e) 'Rec'ommendatiDns fDr adjustments .of suppDrt moments in restrained slabs have

detennine sw~y or no sWay conditions.

g) RecDmmendatiDns havebee~ made fDr lap length ~fhDDks fDr bars

in direct tensiDn and ilexural tension.

h) RecDmmendatiDnsregarding strength DfweldShave been modified.

RecDmmendatiDns regarding CDVer tD reinfDrcement have been mDdified. CDver has

The significant change incDrpDrated in SectiDn 4 is the mDdificatiDn DHhe

and experienced supervisor.

BS 5328: Part 3 : 1990CDncrete : Part3 Sl'ecificatioliforthe prDcedures tD be,!

BS 5328 : Part4 : 1990 Concre!~: Part 4 Spedfica;;oll for

SECTION 2 MATERIALS, WORKMANSHIP, INSPECTION AND TESTING

8.2. Requirements for Durability

CONCRETE MIX PROPORTIONING

Nominal Mix Concrete

Quality Assurance Measures

13 TRANSPORTING, PLACING, COMPACTION AND CURING

Transporting and Handling

13.4 Construction Joints and Cold Joints

14 CONCRETING UNDER SPECIAL CONDmoNs

15 SAMPLING AND STRENGTH OF DESIGNED CONCRETE MIX

17 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF STRUCTIlRE

SECTION 3 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATION

19 LOADS AND FORCES

Other Forces and Effects

20 STABILITY OF THE STRUCTURE

26 REQUIREMENTS GOVERNING REINFORCEMENT AND DETAILING

SECTION 4 SPECIAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FO~

RIBBED, HOLLOW BLOCK OR VOIDED SLAB

Size and Position of Ribs

Effective Span of Stairs

Moments and Forces

Transfer of Load at the Base of Column

SECTIONS STRUCnJIW. DESIGN (LiMIT STATE METHOD)

Limit States of Serviceability

Other Limit States

36 CHARAcrERISTIC AND DESIGN VALUES AND PARTIAL SAFETY FACfORS

Characteristic Strength of Materials

LIMIT STATE of COLLAPSB : FulxURB

LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSB: CoMPRESSION

LIMIT STATE OF .CoLLAPSE : SHEAR

Notpinal Shear Stress

LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE: TORSION

42 .LIMIT STATE OF SERVICEABILITY: DEFLECTION

42.1 . Flexural Members

LIMIT STATE OF SBRVICEABILITY: CRACKING

LIST OF REFERRED INDIAN STANDARDS

STRUCTURAL DESIGN (WORKING STRESS METHOD)

General Design Requirements··

Permissible Stresses in Concrete

PERMISSIDLB LOADS IN COMPRESSION MEMBERS